JP6643599B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention provides a special game state in which a round game in which a large winning opening is converted into a state in which a game ball can be easily won is executed a plurality of times when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result. Related to a gaming machine that can be generated.

  When a big hit lottery is won, a big hit display result is derived in the symbol change game, and thereafter, in a gaming machine that provides a big hit game that opens a special winning opening, a big hit production control that controls the execution of a production during the big hit game. A gaming machine provided with means is known (see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-94132

In the conventional gaming machines, it was not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest in special game effects (effects during big hit games).
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest in a special game effect.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A game capable of generating a special game state in which a round game in which a large winning opening is converted to a state in which a game ball is easy to win is executed a plurality of times when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result. On the machine,
A general winning opening in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls,
Effect control means for controlling the effect of the game,
The round game ends when the winning number of the game ball to the special winning opening reaches a specified number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a special game effect including a start effect performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game,
During the execution of the specific round game in the special game state, it is possible to end the start effect and start a round effect corresponding to the specific round game,
In the round effect, it is possible to execute a number-of-payout notification effect corresponding to the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the general winning opening,
In the round effect corresponding to the specific round game after the end of the start effect, in the round effect corresponding to the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the general winning opening during execution of the start effect. It is characterized in that a number notification effect is executed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of the effect during special games can be raised.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability set value change process. It is a flowchart explaining a probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure ordinary process. (A) is a flowchart illustrating the special figure 1 change start processing, and (b) is a flowchart illustrating the special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure changing process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process in the effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of the setting of the probability set value. 13 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a first modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 2nd modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a fixed condition monitoring process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a third modification. It is a flow chart explaining shift judgment processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability set value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means in a 5th modification, and a game control device. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation processing in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 10th modification. It is a figure for explaining the information mode in the 11th modification. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a figure explaining an over prize information production. It is a figure explaining an over prize information production. It is a figure explaining an over prize information production. It is a figure explaining an over prize information production. It is a figure explaining an over prize information production. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining a winning number notification effect. It is a figure explaining the number-of-payouts information production. It is a figure explaining the number-of-payouts information production. It is a figure explaining the number-of-payouts information production.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation handle 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is configured to be surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (CRT). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 serving as a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure change display game is provided by operating movable effect members. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In addition, the lower left portion of the center case 40 displays a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41, and a sub-display for displaying the number of startup memories. An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub-information display device 90 includes a first light-emitting unit that is a single light-emitting unit that forms a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol that executes a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game. A second sub-display comprising a sub-game display section 91 and a single light-emitting section serving as a sub-game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game A game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure change display game, using two light-emitting units, and a second special figure change display game executed using two light-emitting units. And a second sub-display unit 94 that indicates the number of second start-up memories that are the right to perform.

  In the first sub-game display section 91 and the second sub-game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is being changed and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking, and lit of the light emitting section. Can be displayed. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 indicate the numbers of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memories (special figure 2 hold) by turning off the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

  Since the sub-information display device 90 is provided separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 so that the display region of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display region is effectively used. be able to. The sub-information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board effect device 44, so that the sub-information display device 90 is not covered during the operation of the board effect device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate 34 (a normal figure start gate, a start area, an inflow area) for giving a start condition of the general figure change display game. A game ball that has won the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general prize ports 35 are arranged. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning port 36 (first start winning port, starting area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the first special figure variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, immediately below the start winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure changing display game.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in is maintained. Then, when the result of the normal-floating fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the opening of the game ball is easy to flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (an advantageous state for the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that a prize can be won even when the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is in the closed state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and to the right of the starting winning opening 36, special fluctuations that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special fluctuation prize winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The special winning opening is converted from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and during a special gaming state or a small hitting game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Has become. In addition, inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball flowing into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the special winning opening switches 38a in this manner, the game balls flowing into the special winning opening can be quickly detected.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), thereby aiming at winning in the starting winning opening 36, and firing a game ball to the right game area (so-called). By right-handing), it is possible to aim for a prize to the ordinary figure starting gate 34, the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the special variable prize winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through a flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the formation member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path formation member 42 from the front of the flow path formation member 42. .

  In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, which constitute the special figure change display game, and the general figure start gate 34 are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game triggered by winning, and displaying various information.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure change display game, which is configured with a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A second special-figure fluctuation display unit (figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, a fluctuating display unit (general figure display) 53 for the general-figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and an LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, 56 for informing the start storage number of each of the variable display games.
The collective display device 50 also includes a first game state display unit (a first game state display unit, a right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game, and A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time-saving state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs and notifies that a time-saving state has occurred, A third game state display section (third game state display, probability state display section) 59 for displaying that the game has been made, and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variable winning device 38). Is provided.
The collective display device 50 may further include a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the user of the big hit occurrence.

The special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during execution of the change display game, that is, while the decorative special figure change display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is blinked in addition to the center segment, and the change is performed. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “losing”, for example, the center segment is turned on as a result of the loss, and when the result of the game is “hit”, the result of the hit (special result) is determined. A game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

  The general-purpose indicator 53 blinks the lamp during the change to indicate that the change is occurring, and displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game after a predetermined time. In addition, the general-purpose display indicator 56 displays the number of stored memories (= reservation number) of the general-purpose start gate 34, which is a change start condition of the general-purpose display 53, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 hold display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the winning prize balls to the start winning opening 36 which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display 51 by a plurality of LEDs. It is indicated by turning off, blinking, and lighting. The special figure 2 hold display 55 indicates the number of start memories (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (ordinary change winning device 37), which is a change start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off a plurality of LEDs, Display by blinking and lighting.

  The first game state display section (right strike notification section) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the left strike is more advantageous to the player than the right strike (normal strike). If the player is in a gaming state in which right-handing is more advantageous to the player than left-handing (right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display section (time saving state notification section) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp in a normal game state where no time saving state occurs (when the variable time reduction function is not activated). When the time reduction state occurs (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The third game state display section (probability state display section) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp if the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable change state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not performed, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn on the light. The round display section may be constituted by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The CPU 110 operates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. In other words, it is a backup storage unit that can retain the data stored by the game control device 100 even when the power is off. When the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage unit. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or non-reach variable display game (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines whether the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game or the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state). State), the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of stored start times, and the like, and any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected. To get. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A constitutes a change distribution information obtaining means for obtaining any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, It is connected to a gate switch 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, and a special winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the normal figure starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when detecting an abnormality of the sensor or the switch are input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124 is a setting value change unit serving as a detection unit for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value of a special result in the special figure change display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

  The setting key switch 152 detects an operation of a setting key operation unit which is a first operation unit among the operation units. The setting key operation unit includes a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that the switch has been turned to the second position. The switch is turned on when the switch is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

  The set value change switch 151 detects an operation of a set value change button which is a second operation unit of the operation unit. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and is turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

  By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is determined in the game. Is being used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to the respective probability setting values are 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/280 in setting 5, and 1/280 in setting 6. 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is ten times the probability value in the normal probability state.

  When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by pressing the set value change button in this probability set value changed state. The selected probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

  When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit being turned to the second position in a state where the front frame 12 is closed, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on after the game machine is turned on. When it is turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is set in which the probability setting value cannot be changed.

  The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability set values with numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that can recognize the probability setting value. In addition, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability setting value may be indicated by a lighting mode, an emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs. Alternatively, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the information of the probability set value may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. In this case, while the operation relating to the probability set value is being performed (probability set value change state, probability set value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability set value is displayed, and otherwise, the calculated base value and the ratio of the accessory Give priority to display.

  In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability set value display device 153, and the like, and the game control device 100 uses the probability value used for the lottery of the special figure change display game. The setting means makes it possible to select a probability set value to which is assigned from among a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, a setting unit may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, an operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub-board may be used. The probability set value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the set value change switch 151 or the set key switch 152, and the determined result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to a not-shown test test device via the relay substrate 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). Out ball detection switch signal (based on detection by an out switch detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished playing). The first input port 122 is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 is provided via the data bus 140 takes in the Ku signal).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited institution (not shown), a signal indicating the jackpot probability state, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (generic solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. Is provided with a second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data. Further, the second output port 134 outputs display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

  The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output section 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability set value display device 153 that displays the selected probability set value.

  Further, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 is output to the output unit 130. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fifth method for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying the display data on the status display device 160 is described. Driver 138e is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and stores stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a timekeeping unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, and the like) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processes such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the provided board effect device 44 (for example, a movable role or the like that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a production device) or the like, and a movable production member that performs a production of a game including a special figure variable display game by a movable production member that operates. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the input and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, the cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of directional change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35. The player wins the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening that has been won are given to the payout control device 200 ( The glass unit 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 from the payout unit controlled by the control unit (see FIG. 3).

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact switch for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit inside passes through the ordinary start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, the general figure starting memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four If it is less than ()), the number of ordinary figure start storages is added (+1) and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the general-purpose starting prize is displayed on the general-purpose reserve display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the random number value (hit random number value) for judging to determine the result of the general figure change display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the general figure start storage. Is to be done.

  Then, when there is a general-figure start memory and the general-figure fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the general-figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the general-figure fluctuation display game hits, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first map stored in the first place is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the first game. Then, a process of starting the normal figure change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the general-figure variation display game wins, and a specific result mode (general-figure specific result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined variation time on a general-purpose indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general-purpose variation display game. After performing the general-floating display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, a process of displaying a general-floor display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is fluctuated for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may comprise.

  In the case where the result of the normal symbol change display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is any one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which forms a special result mode is displayed on the general symbol display 53 in accordance with the type of hit. At the same time as the stop display, the control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above, by operating the general-purpose solenoid 37c. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general-figure variation display game is out of control, a control is performed on the general-purpose display 53 to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the out-of-position.

  The winning ball in the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 switch 37a respectively provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning port 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). At the same time, the second start memory, which is the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as starting storage information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of the start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as display. The information is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  Then, when the first special figure change display game or the second special figure change display game is ready to be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first special figure change display game in the earliest start memory corresponding to the start special figure change display game. The determined random number for big hit determination is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set in accordance with the probability setting value, and processing for determining a hit or miss of the special figure change display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variable display game to be executed.

  Then, when executing the first special figure change display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) for a predetermined change time. After the special figure 1 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. When the second special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) for a predetermined variation time. After the special figure 2 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  In the effect control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numerals, symbols, and characters) are displayed on the display device 41 (variable display device) corresponding to the special figure variable display game. A process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game for varyingly displaying symbols and the like is performed. In addition, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special design (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like on the display device 41 is displayed in the left variation display region (first special design) and the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify (high-speed fluctuation). Then, the symbols fluctuating after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. This is performed by displaying the result of the special figure change display game in a result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest.

  Then, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state and a small hitting game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding thereto also becomes the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

  In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, to play the game into the large winning opening. Control to enable the inflow of the ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or until a predetermined opening possible time elapses after the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) of continuing (repeat) this predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game is in the high probability state based on the result mode of the special figure change display game, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game do not change. Both of the variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high probability state, second operation state) as the game state after the end of the special game state. It has become. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the ordinary figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state. That is, the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is controlled in one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which a prize is easier than the first operation state. .

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-floor display game (normal-figure fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure fluctuating display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first stop symbol (normal electric opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (ordinary power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit stop symbol (ordinary power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure open time are appropriately set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the above-described general-purpose variation display game to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is set to be shorter than the first stop time). 704 ms). Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal power release time) is changed to the second state in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of the general public opening, the general electric opening time, and the general probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure change display may be performed independently or not simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed independently and not simultaneously. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure change display game is executed with priority over the first special figure change display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, and when the execution of the special figure change display game becomes possible, the second special figure change display game is executed. It is executed (prioritized). In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the special winning port switch. 38a, the out switch for detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished the game is provided with a coil for detecting magnetism, and the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. , A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, a micro switch having mechanical contacts is provided for a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 or the like. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, a process for inhibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of an area for saving. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step S4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Accordingly, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to calculate the check data excluding a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  The third input port 124 receives a signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and a signal from the body frame opening detection switch. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on, and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 forms an opening / closing detection unit capable of detecting the opening / closing state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the front frame 12 is opened and the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is set. Becomes When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position and the set value change button is pressed, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the opening of the front frame 12 is a condition.

  By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the elapse of the standby time, it is necessary to keep operating the set value change button from the time the power is turned on until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on cannot be accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (Step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (Steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all output ports (sets no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 forms a validity determining unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit at power-on is valid. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the state is the probability set value change state (step S21). In the case of the probability set value change state, it can be determined from the fact that the probability set value changing flag is set.

  If the state is the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, where the RAM is initialized and the probability set value is changed to a probability set value change state. Here, it is determined that the probability set value is being changed when the power is turned off and the data in the RAM is normally backed up while the probability set value is being changed. It is set to the value change state. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

  In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability set value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for status display are set in order from the top. In the area for the probability set value, a probability set value area for storing information on the currently set probability set value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability set value are set. Is done. The work area includes a work probability set value area for storing information on the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for the initial value random number, a large hit symbol initial value random number, a small hit symbol initial value random number, a hit initial value random number, and a hit symbol initial value random number which are updated as needed are stored. In addition, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated as needed are stored in the area for the fluctuation pattern random numbers. In the area for game control, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored, and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for state display, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a ratio of the accessory, and the like, and a stack area are set.

  The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by an out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and completed the game, and the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the ratio of the bonuses is, during the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending), of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. This is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of balls obtained for each role) (so-called continuous ratio of ratios) obtained by winning the special winning opening in the special winning opening, and information necessary to display the ratio of the role. Includes, for example, information on the total number of awarded balls (total number of awarded balls) and information on the number of awarded balls (the number of acquired balls for each role).

  The RAM clear start address 2 is a start address of an area for an initial value random number. By performing a process of clearing the RAM with this address set, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, The game control area is cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clearing target. A RAM clear start address 1 described later is a start address of a probability set value area. By performing a process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the probability set value area, an initial value random number, and the like are set. Area, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared. Further, a RAM clear start address 3 to be described later is a start address of a game control area. By performing a process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the game control area is cleared. Become.

  It should be noted that the status display area is determined to be valid in the status display edit output process in the timer interrupt process described later and is initialized when abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal In the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 set in this case is set, the area for status display may be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 is set, all the areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

  In the checksum calculation processing in step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the game control work area. Note that one or more of a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a fluctuation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a state display area may be targeted. When a plurality of areas are targeted, the checksum of each area may be calculated separately, and the validity may be individually determined. The determination may be made collectively.

  If the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the state of the third input port 124 previously read (step S23). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, in which a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value to a probability set value change state are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 previously read. Then, it is determined whether the set value change switch is on (step S24).

  If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (Step S24; N), the process proceeds to Step S30, and the processing in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed. If the setting value change switch is ON (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 transmits data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Is an initialization means for initializing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (Step S16; N or Step S17; N), and when it is determined that the checksums do not match (Step S19; N), Step S25 is performed. Then, the process of initializing all the RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when the RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

  First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is open (step S26). If the main body frame is open (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the state of the third input port 124 previously read (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, in which a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value to a probability set value change state are performed. As will be described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the initial value random number are set. , The area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. Note that the area for state display may also be initialized here.

  When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (Step S27; N) or when the main body frame is not in the open state (Step S26; N), the command of the setting change instruction (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), prohibits RAM access (step S29), stops control, and waits for power-off of the gaming machine. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and operates the panel effect device 44 based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction. Then, a notification that prompts the user to change the probability setting value is issued by outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. This notification is continued until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

  In this case, after turning off the power of the gaming machine, turning on the power again with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 being opened, the setting key is set in the process of step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), and the process shifts to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability set value to a probability set value change state. When the control is stopped in step S29, without turning off the power of the gaming machine, the front frame 12 is not opened or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the transition to the probability set value changing state cannot be performed, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

  Note that the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, but the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the notification may be performed in the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100, and the display not used as identification information is performed in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Alternatively, a display for notifying an abnormality may be provided.

  In step S30 of FIG. 6 as a process in the case of normal recovery from a power failure, an initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in an area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area in the RWM where the game state is stored is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variable display game is the high probability state (step S31).

  Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), the process skips steps S32 and S33 and shifts to step S34. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error display) provided on the game board 30 is provided. (ON) data is saved in the segment area (step S33).

  Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demonstration command when in a customer waiting state, a recovery screen command otherwise) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information that is the information of the selected probability set value to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform an effect according to the probability set value, or to perform a game effect according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value, such as changing the selection probability.

  The screen designation command transmits a command according to the restarted game state. When restarting the special figure fluctuation display game interrupted by the power cutoff due to the restart of the control, a restoration screen command serving as restoration information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, in this case, information relating to the result of the special figure variable display game to be restarted is also transmitted. Further, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, a customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Also, when restarting the special game state interrupted by the power cutoff with the restart of the control, a special game state restart command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

  In step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as a process of initializing the RAM and bringing the probability set value into a changeable probability set value state. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). If the backed up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear start address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the status display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number need not be cleared.

  On the other hand, when the backed-up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability set value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number are set. And the game control areas (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. That is, the game control device 100 forms an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). Note that the area for state display may also be initialized here.

  The area to be initialized is an area where a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, 0 is set in the area for the probability set value, so that the probability set value is set to 1. By setting the probability setting value having the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize damage to the game store even when the RAM is cleared due to abnormality or fraud. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

  After that, a probability set value changing flag is set as a process for setting a probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the state is changed to the probability set value change state. Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S38). This makes it possible to display information on the currently set probability set value on the probability set value display device 153.

  Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and a command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). Then, control goes to a step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the A notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is issued by an operation, sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM has been initialized, a command for initializing the RAM is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, the security signal may be output for a predetermined time by setting a timer, or the security signal may be output continuously during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Here, since the RAM has not been initialized, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

  In addition, as a process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, a RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and initialization is performed. The initial value at the time of initializing the RAM is saved in the area to be processed (step S43). As a result, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial values are saved. A timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 forms an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

  Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 suspension number command, the special figure 2 suspension number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, the RAM initialization A plurality of commands, such as an initialization command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demonstration screen and notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information that is the information of the selected probability set value to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform an effect according to the probability set value, or to perform a game effect according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value, such as changing the selection probability.

  In step S45, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) A predetermined value of RWM is used as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), a random number for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol (hit random number), and a random number for determining the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol (hit symbol random number). After saving in the area (step S47), an interrupt is permitted (step S48). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update processing, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure change display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a special figure change display. It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a small hit stop symbol of the game. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the ordinary figure variation display game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a stop symbol of the ordinary figure variation display game. Is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit. Some gaming machines do not have a winning symbol initial value random number depending on the model.

  Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which a start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Note that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure is detected. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number updating process (step S49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S49 includes a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S53) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

  Then, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off (step S57) and a process of saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (set value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization operation unit. Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and reading the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time. Becomes

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

  In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process may return to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeatedly performed until the setting key switch is turned on. . That is, the control of the game may be stopped, and the control may wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 instead of the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, when the state in which the processes of steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be shut off.

  Here, the condition for shifting to the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is open and the setting key switch is on, The open state of the frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as conditions, or the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as a condition.

  Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the probability set value change state only on condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state without the setting key switch. That is, when the processing of steps S22 and S23 is not performed and the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the processing may shift to step S35 in FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. By ending without setting or by setting the same probability setting value and ending, it is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control. If the transition to the probability set value change state is made only on condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be used.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control, and a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is allocated are stored in an operation unit (a set key operation unit (a set key switch 152), a set value change button (a set value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is capable of holding the stored contents even in the power-off state (RAM 111C). ), Validity determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means at power-on is valid, and selecting a probability set value. Initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is not valid by the validity determination means In such a case, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state. When the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game arcade is also lost, and the initial value is set. However, the initialization that is performed by prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the probability that the probability setting value that the gaming shop does not intend remains from being set.

  The control unit is configured to be in a state where a probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage unit is determined by the validity determination unit. If it is determined that the setting is not valid, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on information from the game control means, the game control means, When the validity determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means On the basis of the reception of the notification, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect to continue to select the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  Further, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value. A control means (game control device 100) and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned are stored in a first operation unit (a setting key operation unit (a setting key switch 152)) and a second operation unit (a setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value changing switch 151), and the control means can retain the stored contents even in a power-off state. If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, recovery is performed based on the information stored in the storage unit, and the power is turned on. Sometimes, when the first operation unit is operated, a changeable state is set in which the probability setting value can be changed by the setting unit. This means that the means is initialized. Therefore, the change of the probability set value and the operation of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, and the operation efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  The setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability set value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  Further, the control means includes a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on is valid, and the validity determination means stores the information in the storage means. If it is determined that the information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification for prompting initialization of the storage unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state.

  When the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the control unit sets a changeable state in which the setting unit can change the probability set value, and initializes the storage unit. If the validity determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation section is not operated, the first operation section is operated. That is, the notification that prompts the user to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state.

  Further, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value. A control means (game control device 100) and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned are assigned to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change The setting means (game control device 100) which enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the switches 151)) and the control means including the information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means are required for controlling the game. Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information, wherein the control means is provided when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units is operated. Storage means so that the was is initialized. Therefore, the change of the probability set value and the operation of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, and the operation efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. When the signal of the firing stop is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to the enabled state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which is the target of the initial value random number update process, 1. A random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of Tokuzu 2 is performed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a shown in FIG. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for performing a front frame or a glass frame is not opened.

  Next, a probability set value change process (step S108) for performing a process related to change and confirmation of the probability set value is performed, and it is determined whether the state is the probability set value changed state (step S109). In the case of the probability set value change state, it can be determined from the fact that the probability set value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

  If the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), payout command transmission processing (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processings to the payout control device 200 as processing relating to the progress of the game. A special figure game process (step S112) for performing a process related to the figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S113) for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the state is the probability set value change state (step S109; Y) or when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above-described processing regarding the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be advanced.

  Note that in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission processing (step S111), the special figure game processing (step S112), and the general figure game processing (step S113) are not performed. However, it may be performed for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission processing (step S111) may be performed, and the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability set value change state, the random number update processing 1 (step S105) and the random number update processing 2 (step S106) are not performed, and in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the random number is not updated. You may do it. Further, the type of processing that is not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114) for driving the segment LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Fraud monitoring process (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the controller and determining whether there is any abnormality, and fraudulent radio wave for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. (Step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output processing, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is obtained (step S143). S144). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to the digit / external information output port. 136 (step S146).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). Thereby, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by the dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", and "big hit signal 3" 4), the data of the “symbol confirmation frequency signal”, the data of the “start-up signal”, and the data of the “main prize ball signal” and the output data of the firing permission (step S150). It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information and the emission permission signal (step S151).

  Next, off output data of probability set value display is set as display content on the probability set value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether a probability set value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability set value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability set value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability set value.

  If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as a probability setting value display. Output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

  Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded from the probability set value display data area as test signal output data. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value in the test signal to the test shooting device, the data for display of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the process and allows accurate information to be output without changing the information on the probability set value. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

  Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S162). If not (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Thereafter, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission processing, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball which is an area to be used and for which a main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

Each of the winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in the present embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count value of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more untransmitted signals may be transmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three winning ball counter areas, the ten winning ball counter areas, and the fourteen winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1. Each of the three prize ball counter areas, the ten prize ball counter areas, and the fourteen prize ball counter areas in the winning number counter area 2 is configured to store up to 255 wins.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 to repeat the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the value is equal to or greater than 0 (step S189; Y), the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, each time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the output count of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the result of the subtraction is saved in the award ball remaining area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing for transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. Is done. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted every timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out the prize ball. When it is in the state, a payout command is transmitted. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, so that the useless processing is performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the ON state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, during a ball lending operation, during a shot ball out error, during an overflow error, during a frame radio wave illegal occurrence, during a payout ball detection switch (paid out). Counting the number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a dropped ball, during an underpayment error, during an overpayment error (the number of unpaid award balls = the number of remaining game balls) ) (When it is not 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

  When there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and repeats the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the prize ball command is issued.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the prize that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side. It is possible to realize accurate payout control without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control apparatus 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Further, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can output the prize ball. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed comprehensively, and the game balls are transferred to the winning areas (starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) provided in the game area 32. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. 200), and the game control means pays out a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. Control to transmit to the means, if a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. Payment A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means being continuously output for a predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. That is what you are doing.

  In the game area 32, a plurality of prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, special variable prize apparatus 38) are provided, and a game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball is provided for each number of prize balls, and a state signal can start payout control. When there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal is transmitted to the payout control means. The determination as to whether or not the payout control can be started is performed prior to the determination as to whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on a prize of a game ball in a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, special variable prize apparatus 38). And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means controls the payout command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether the payout control can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) to be transmitted to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a predetermined prize area. The gaming machine External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the unit, wherein the external information output means determines whether or not the status signal output from the payout control means allows the payout control means to start payout control Irrespective of the above, the prize ball signal is output.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary fluctuation prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, special fluctuation port) A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is supplied to the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), And the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and can play the game in the predetermined prize area. Ball prize In addition, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, updating when a game ball is awarded in the predetermined winning area, and accumulating the number of winning balls by an external information output means. By performing the update in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the accumulation processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the scheduled number of game balls to be paid becomes ten, and the number of game balls paid out is ten from the payout control device 200. , A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of times of output of the main prize ball number signal by +1 (a subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every ten payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of times of output.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the plan and the result can be matched. It can respond to improper payment. In addition, even if a prize is won during the jackpot, the payout is delayed due to lack of a ball or the like, and even if the payout is made after the end of the jackpot, the hall con (hole computer) can be accurately determined by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (determined).

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In the winning port switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the state is the probability set value change state (step S299). In the case of the probability set value change state, it can be determined from the fact that the probability set value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

  If the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processing after step S301 is performed as processing relating to the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the state is the probability set value change state (step S299; Y) or when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. In other words, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be performed without performing the process related to winning.

  In the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the special variable prize device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal dynamic prize device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and a prize port that can always win. Is not monitored, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing that is not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

  In step S301, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the winning opening switches 38a in the winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). An illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor the winning opening for an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating a position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to a target switch, a lower address of illegal monitoring information, a lower address of an illegal winning number area, an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning The upper limit of the number (the number of fraud occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning opening monitoring table includes, in addition to the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning opening switch 38a in the winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the winning opening is not opened even if the opening is not open. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step S304) is performed to monitor the mouth for illegal winning and detect a normal winning.

  Next, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S305), and even if the public telephone is not open, it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning in the public telephone. Then, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning port monitoring table for a winning port switch (for example, the starting port 1 switch 36a or the winning port switch 35a for the general winning port 35) that can always win is prepared (step S307), and the winning counter is updated to update the winning number. The processing (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals whose status is to be monitored and which of the signals is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as an occurrence of an error is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the payout abnormal status signal is set. You.

  Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 so that if the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is “1”, state monitoring based on a signal output from the body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is performed. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine for determining whether an error has occurred or not is determined. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality that is output due to occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define the case where the state scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is “0”, so that the processing is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 ms.

[Probability set value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability set value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the probability set value changing process, first, it is determined whether the state is the probability set value changed state (step S401). Is performed (step S422), and the probability set value changing process ends.

  If the probability setting value change state is present (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. . If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the information of the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output processing described above (see FIG. 8). If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output processing described above.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The changed probability set value is a state in which a probability setting value to be used in a game is newly set by performing a determination operation described later, and in this case, the probability set value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

  Then, in determining whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability set value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

  If there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value of the work probability set value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0-5. The values of 0 to 5 in the work probability set value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6 respectively, and the value of the work probability set value area is updated by +1 each time the set value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value changes sequentially. When the value of the work probability set value area is updated by +1 when the value is 5, the value returns to 0. Also, at this stage, only the value of the work probability set value area is changed, and the value of the probability set value area storing the probability set value used for the game does not change. The probability set value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability set value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is six here, other numbers may be used.

  Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the work probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S408). Thereby, the data displayed on the probability set value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability set value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). Thereby, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the set value change button, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is turned off, a blank display is displayed, and the information of the new probability set value is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated.

  Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, in the case where the display of the probability set value is performed using numbers 1 to 6, a display other than the numbers may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability set value. When the display of the probability set value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability set value may be blinked as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which the display is blinked, a display mode in which the cycle of blinking is different from that in the case of non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from that in the case of not the specific display. .

  In addition, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the panel effect device 44 The specific notification, which is the notification that the selected probability set value has been changed, may be performed by the operation described above, sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. That is, the specific notification may be performed together with or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability set value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 display 51, and the special figure 2 display.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting a contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is a contact. If there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), the probability set value change processing ends. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is loaded and saved in the probability set value area (step S412). Thereby, the selected probability set value is set as the probability set value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a determination operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be set as the finalizing operation, and an operation unit for the finalizing operation may be provided in the setting unit.

  After that, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S413). Next, a probability set value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability set value change process ends. . The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and controls the display of the panel effect device 44 based on the reception of the command for changing the probability set value. The fact that the probability set value has been changed is notified by operation, sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

  On the other hand, if the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is at the second position, the probability setting value change processing ends. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and the clear target is set. Is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

  As a result, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. A timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the status display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may be cleared. Also, in the probability set value area, the area related to the change work, such as a work probability set value area for temporarily storing information on the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state and various flags, is cleared. You. Therefore, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability set value display device 153 ends. Further, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

  Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S420), and a command to end the change of the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S421), and the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and controls the display of the panel effect device 44 based on the reception of the command for changing the probability set value. A notification that the change of the probability set value has been completed is given by an operation, a sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as notification that the RAM has been initialized.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, the probability setting A plurality of commands, such as a change end command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The probability setting change end command may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information that is the information of the selected probability set value to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform an effect according to the probability set value, or to perform a game effect according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value, such as changing the selection probability.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for providing a player with a gaming value, Based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), a plurality of types of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery are assigned are set. Setting means (game control device 100) that allows the user to select from the list, the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, and When the display of the display unit is updated in response to the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

  Further, the setting means displays a display which is not used as the display of the information of the probability set value as the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

  Also, the setting means displays the updated information as a specific display in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period for a certain period. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows a probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability set value confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. When the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag during the probability set value confirmation mode is set.

  If the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S433).

  The game being played is a case in which the special figure change display game is being executed, the general figure change display game is being executed, the special game state is being performed, or the general figure is being hit. That is, this is a case where the state of the game is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the game is being played, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, information indicating that the game cannot be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect may be notified.

  Note that conditions for determining that a game is being played (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. During the execution of the special figure change display game, during the execution of the normal figure change display game, during the special game state, or one of a plurality of states selected from among the hit states of the general figure, conditions may be used. It may be determined that the game is being played if the situation corresponds to either the execution of the variable display game or the special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is being played and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  Further, even if a game ball is detected by an out switch that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and the game has been completed, it is determined that the game is being played for a predetermined period and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is being played, and the mode may not be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, during the power saving mode in which a transition is made when a certain period of time elapses in a state in which no game is played, the transition to the probability set value confirmation mode may not be performed. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

  If the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to be in the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. If the setting key switch is ON (step S434; Y), the flag in the probability set value confirmation mode is set (step S435), and the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability set value check mode is started, and information on the currently set probability set value is displayed as a display on the probability set value display device 153.

  After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), a command during the confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is performed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, The fact that the probability set value is being confirmed is notified by the operation of the device 44, the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S439). If the setting key switch is on (step S439; Y), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

  If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the flag in the probability set value confirmation mode is cleared (step S440), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Then, a command to end the probability set value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the reception of the command for ending the probability set value confirmation.

  That is, the probability set value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and is ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the state is changed to the probability setting value change state.

  As described above, by setting the setting key switch to the ON state during the game and not shifting to the probability set value check mode, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. It should be noted that, while the game is being played, even if the setting key switch is turned on, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode. When it becomes, it shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

  In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode is set to a game, but the condition is not limited to this. The transition to the probability set value confirmation mode is performed according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. What is necessary is to select whether or not to perform. For example, when the state is the high probability state, the mode may not be shifted to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as described later, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode may not be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value is provided with A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)). In the case where the state of the game controlled by the control unit is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the confirmation state, Work unit is that it has not to a confirmation state be a predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode in accordance with the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by indicating the probability set value.

  The prohibited state is a state where the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  The prohibited state is a state in which a special game state is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  Further, a normal variable winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be easily won, and which can generate a right to execute a game by winning, and a predetermined condition being satisfied. A general state game (a general state change display game) is executed on the basis of the above, and when the result of the general state game is a specific result, the normal state change winning device 37 is converted to the open state. A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which a general-purpose game is being executed or in a hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  The setting unit sets the operation unit to a predetermined state in a state in which the state of the game controlled by the control unit is a prohibition state, and when the prohibition state ends with the predetermined state, the prohibition state of the prohibition state is set. The confirmation state is set based on the end. Therefore, when the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 serving as the second starting port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and special features based on the winning are obtained. At the stage before the start of the figure change display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the change of the special figure change display game are performed. A special map ordinary process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A7, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. The processing during the fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the big winning opening and the big hit end processing are executed. A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hitting A small hit fanfare medium process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "8" in step A7, a small hitting middle process (step A16) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. .
If the special figure game processing number is "9" in step A7, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining sphere winning in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing, and the small hit ending processing Small ball remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the processing.
If the special figure game processing number is "10" in step A7, a small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), a symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. . After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) relating to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. Then, the special figure game process ends. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a first starting port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize in the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is during working hours (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. An effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the case of the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the first starting port receives a prize during the time-saving state (ie, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to issue a notification (warning) to instruct the right control to be performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first starting port (start winning port 36) (step A107), a special process for a special figure starting port switch (step A108) is performed.

Next, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether there is a prize in the second starting port. A determination is made (step A111).
In step A111, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second opening (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is operating, that is, the normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step is performed. The process proceeds to A114 to perform the subsequent processes. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a regular electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not an irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that a fraud has occurred if the number of illegal winnings in the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In step A113, if it is determined that normal telephone fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The startup port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the startup port switch monitoring process ends. If it is determined in step A113 that irregularities in the ordinary telephone are occurring (step A113; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the non-winning information of the monitoring target start port among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 by the game machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

  In addition, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1 ( (Step A136), and save the target starting port winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition processing is stored in the RWM. Save to the area (step A139). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) has been won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), an effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting winning opening 36 or the starting region of the normal variable winning device 37, and starts the variable display game execution right. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as storage. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) in the above-described startup port switch common processing will be described. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting port winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is checked to determine whether or not the first starting port (starting winning port 36) is a winning. (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not made to the first starting port (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special figure is being shortened (step A152).

In step A152, when it is determined that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special figure is not working (step A152; N), it is determined whether a large hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not being performed or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the result of the determination is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random numbers is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) has been won (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A158; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not the small hit has occurred. If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common processing is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (Step A162), and the process proceeds to Step A164.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A166). A167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A169), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 which are executed at the start of the special figure change display game in the special figure ordinary processing. That is, the determination according to the set probability set value is performed. The special figure information setting processing in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A167 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

(Normal processing of special maps)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 suspension number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A305). When it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is “0” (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309). A309; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to the special figure ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure ordinary processing is ended. That is, when the special figure change display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, a customer waiting demonstration command serving as standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, in step A309, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309; Y), the process shifts to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

If the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” in step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step A302). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 change start processing (step A304) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.
If the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” in step A305 (step A305; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A306). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 change start processing (step A308) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  As described above, the check of the special figure 2 reservation number is performed before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, so that if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A304) Will be executed. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A308) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discriminating area (step A321). In order to determine whether or not the first special figure change display game is a small hit, the slip information and the big hit information are set in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the special figure change display game is a big hit. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A332). Here, 100 ms is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, “0”) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A304) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 2 change start processing is processing to be performed at the start of the second special figure change display game, and the same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. This is performed for storage.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, first, a special figure 2 change flag indicating the type of special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the change symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step A352). Here, 100 ms is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, “0”) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ends.

  In the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing, when a change pattern of the special figure change display game is selected, information on the set probability set value may be referred to. This makes it possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies a probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing performed in the big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A381). An upper limit determination value table is provided for each probability setting value, and defines an upper limit determination value in a high probability state and an upper limit determination value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability set value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value, the big hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

  Next, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability set value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is made different depending on the probability set value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, as in the case of the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used according to the probability state is selected. And set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Note that the loss in step A389 means that the hit is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that a small hit is determined in a small hit determination process later. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (step A384). When the state is the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value during the high probability is obtained (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387). ). If the state is not the high-probability state (step A384; N), an upper-limit judgment value during low-probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper-limit judgment value (step A387). . The upper limit determination value obtained here is obtained with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing performed in the big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability setting value. In addition, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether the state is the high probability state. In addition, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value at the same probability setting value do not overlap. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

  Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. By setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting values are different. When the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

  Note that, similarly to the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit determination value may be obtained from the set upper limit determination value table. Alternatively, the upper limit determination value in the big hit determination and the small hit upper limit determination value in the small hit determination may be defined collectively in a determination value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be made different depending on the probability setting value. To select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

  The probability setting value referred to in the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) are shown. When the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, the setting may be performed as a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1). The game may be stopped and an error notification may be given. Further, the probability setting value is referred to for each of the big hit determination and the small hit determination, but when the probability set value is set in the probability set value change state, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability set value is set. Alternatively, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may be referred to only when determining a big hit or a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to a changing symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 changing flag or special figure 2 changing flag) is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting is performed. The processing is performed (step A602). That is, a symbol stop command as stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variable time of the running special figure variable display game ends and the result is derived and displayed. In response to the reception of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuating display of the fancy special figure fluctuating display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuating display game and stops and displays the result.

  Thereafter, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be varied depending on the stop symbol pattern. . That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Next, a process number “2” relating to the process of displaying a special figure is set as a process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in a special figure game process number area (step A606).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 2 (eg, the special symbol) 2 The signal during fluctuation is turned off) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initialized in the symbol determination number signal control timer area relating to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. The value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as a control information of the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display unit 51, a stop flag related to a change stop on the special figure 1 display unit 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A610). ), As a control information for the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), the special figure changing process ends.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM A process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (the special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variable display game is started. (For example, turning on the condition device operating signal, turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 in step A705, if it is determined that the big hit is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and it is a big hit (step A706). If it is determined to be A706; Y), a test signal (for example, a signal during the operation of the condition device is turned ON, a signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned on, The signal per special symbol (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. (Step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716). A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when a big hit with a payout (a big win opening information other than the big win opening information 1) is ON, and a big hit without a payout (a so-called sudden big hit, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is ON when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the hit is a big hit with a payout, and is OFF when the hit is a big hit without a payout.

  After that, the special winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning as a result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the mouth unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, a fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in one of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. A special game state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability change count area for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in the high probability state is set. Is performed (step A726) to update the value (number of high-probability fluctuations), and effect mode information check processing for setting the effect mode (step A727), and the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high. It is determined whether the state is the probability state (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in a high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A729), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the flow shifts to a process of step A733. The small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in the high probability state (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variable display game is the high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is determined by the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so that the user is not conscious of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, “7” related to the small hit fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (big hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal related to the start of the small hitting game (for example, a special symbol 1 small hitting signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A739), and the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the display LED during right-handed use (eg, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of times of the high probability change for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in the high probability state is determined. High-probability-variation-number update processing (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high-probability-variation number), effect-mode information check processing for effect mode setting (step A744), and switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to the effect mode number The number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the plurality of effect modes. (The number of rotations) or the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; N), "0" is set as the process number for the special figure ordinary process (step A749). ), The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A750), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the special figure displaying process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A746 that the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the production command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step A748), the flow shifts to the processing of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, control of the entire processing relating to the general-figure variation display game, setting of the general-figure display, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the general-figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the general-figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the general-figure fluctuation display game are set. A general routine (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In addition, when the general-figure game processing number is “1” in step B7, the general-figure change processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display processing is performed.

Also, in step B7, if the general-figure game processing number is “2”, if the result of the general-figure change display game is a hit, setting of the general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect Also, a general-figure displaying process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general-floor hitting process is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general figure game processing number is "3", the general figure regular processing is continued or the information necessary for performing the general electric remaining ball processing is set. The processing (step B11) is performed.

If the general-purpose game processing number is "4" in step B7, the general-purpose remaining sphere process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose end process is performed.
If the general-figure game processing number is "5" in step B7, a general-figure-per-stop processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure normal processing is performed.

Then, after preparing a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), a symbol variation control process (step B14) relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general symbol indicator 53 is performed. B15) is performed, and the ordinary map game process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301), and when the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301; Y). ) Sets “0”, which is related to the ordinary drawing ordinary processing, as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), random numbers are loaded from the winning random number storage area of RWM (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1), The loaded areas, that is, the winning random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is reduced. It is determined whether the normal figure high probability is higher than the normal probability (that is, the normal figure low probability), that is, whether it is in the time saving state (step B303).

If it is not during the high figure probabilities (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower judgment value) at the time of the low figure probabilities is set (step B304), and if the high figure probabilities are high (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower-limit judgment value (high-probability lower-limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is determined in step B304 or B305. (Step B307).

If the value of the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag is set. Loss information is saved in the area (step B308), a loss stop symbol number is set (step B309), the loss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is stopped. The image is saved in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hit at the time of low probability of public figure is 0/251, the probability of hit at the time of high probability of public figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”. Therefore, at the time of the low probability of the normal figure, the value is shifted when the value of the hit random number is all “0” to “250”. In addition, at the time of the high probability of the normal figure, the case where the value of the random number is one of “1” to “250” is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number is “0” is a miss.
In the case of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). In other words, the process of raising the rank of the number of reserved general figure holdings 2 to 4 that are held after the number of reserved general figure 1 by one by one with the execution of the general figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved general figure 1 I do. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number for ordinary figure reservation 1 to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figures 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the reserved number of ordinary figures is decremented by one.

Next, a variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in a general-purpose game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the process for setting the process of shifting to the normal figure is performed (step B321) to shift to the process of changing the normal figure, and the normal process is ended. That is, the game control unit 100 executes the general-figure variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the general-figure start gate 34 (inflow area) (based on the general-figure start memory). Make
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, as the fluctuation time, 500 ms is set with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms is set with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms is set with a probability of 16/256. .

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the general figure changing process, first, the process number is set to “2” related to the general figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the display time of the general-figure display game (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the general-figure display game, is saved in the general-figure game processing timer area (step B403). A signal (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and a stop flag indicating that the general graphic fluctuation display game is stopped is stored in the general graphic fluctuation control flag area. The process is saved (step B405), and the normal-floor fluctuation process ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process of displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the process of displaying a normal figure, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal process of the normal figure is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), "0", which is related to ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B515). B516). Thereafter, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone illegal monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the general figure is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, “0”) corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol information is set. Or "5"), and saves it in the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, “4” or “7”) corresponding to the ordinary figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the ordinary figure end pointer area (step B506). Next, the general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general graphic game processing timer area (step B507).

  Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal-per-prize processing (step B508), and the process number is saved in the general-figure game process number area (step B509). After that, a test signal (for example, an ordinary signal for turning on a normal symbol 1 ON) and a signal for starting a normal power operation (for example, turning ON a normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) for a start of a normal figure change display game are given as test signals. On data is saved in the output data area (step B510), and ON data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid (step B511).

  Further, the information of the general telephone count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the general number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 during the regular illegal monitoring period is stored. The information of the illegal winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag (out-of-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process of displaying the ordinary figure ends.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the mid-summer-time hitting process (step B11) in the above-described normal time game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal time per hit figure processing, first, a normal time per hit figure control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal time per hit figure control pointer is equal to or more than the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer during normal operation is determined (step B603). A branching process according to (value before updating +1 in B603) is performed (step B604).
On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not larger than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process of updating the control pointer area during normal operation in step B603 by +1 is not performed. A branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B604).

  If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2", or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the closing of the normal variable prize device 37. The wait time after the closing of the 37 is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B605), and OFF data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary solenoid 37c (step B606). The middle processing per figure ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37. The general power opening time, which is the release time, is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B607), and the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B608). The middle processing is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to open the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37. The normal power release time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the normal power output data area (step B610) to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c. The process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, in which the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is terminated to perform the ordinary electric sphere processing. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B612), and the general electric power remaining sphere processing time is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B614), and the routine-per-intermediate processing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 300 milliseconds as the wait time in step B605, 1700 milliseconds as the normal power release time in step B607, 2600 milliseconds as the normal power open time in step B609, and step B613. To save 600 msec as the normal sphere processing time.
Further, when the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the process of displaying the ordinary figure, “1700 ms” is acquired as the ordinary power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "1700 msec", so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control signal is updated to "1" during normal time, so that the power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer during normal time is updated to "2" for 300 ms. The wait time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "3" so that the public power is released for 1700 ms, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4" for 600 ms. Is set.

  When the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the process of displaying the ordinary figure, "2600 ms" is acquired as the ordinary power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "2600 msec", and the ordinary power is released for 2600 msec. Then, since the control pointer is "5" per ordinary figure, a 300 ms wait time is given. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal operation, so that the public power is released for 2600 ms, and then the control pointer during the normal operation is updated to "7" for 600 ms. The normal electricity remaining sphere processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a general-purpose game (general-purpose variation display game) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and sets the normal variation winning device 37 to an open state when the result of the general-purpose game is a specific result. A normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a converting hit state (normal drawing hit state) is provided.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) On the basis of the information, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when no glass frame opening error has occurred (step S801; N) and when no main frame opening error has occurred (step S802; N), The off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or if a body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, the security signal control timer is updated by −1 ( Step S807). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the RAM initial value when the RAM processing is started in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809) and step S810 Move to the processing of. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the process of step S810 is skipped without performing the process of step S809. Transition.

  Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), In the case where the illegal operation of the telephone is occurring (step S813; Y), or in the case where the illegal operation of the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). (Step S817), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S818), and the process proceeds to Step S819. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, there is no occurrence of improper magnet (step S810; N), no occurrence of panel radio improperity (step S811; N), no occurrence of frame radio improperity (step S812; N), and no occurrence of general electric fraud. (Step S813; N) If it is not during the occurrence of the special winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
If a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If no switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start-up signal editing process (step S820) for editing a winning signal of the start-up port is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S822).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S822). S824), ends the external information editing process.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 32 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, initialization of the VDP 312 is performed (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and drawing commands. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C16).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, and the like are performed. A decoration control process to be performed (step C18), a movable body control process to control a motor and a solenoid of the board effect device 44 (step C19) are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows a received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Also, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for commanding an operation related to a small hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, or the like). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as the number-of-suspended-number command and the error command. (Step C241). The one-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the look-ahead design-related command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start-up memory (holding) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, the display of the decoration special figure start display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. For example, an effect display is performed. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern or a stop pattern corresponding to a start memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

  For a command related to power-on and a command related to the probability setting value, a corresponding process is performed by a single-shot command process. Commands relating to power-on include a command at the time of restoration from a power failure and a command at the time of RAM initialization. Commands relating to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the change in the probability setting, checking the probability setting value, and ending the setting of the probability setting value.

  In the first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. However, the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. May be changed to the probability set value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized at the end of the probability set value change state, whether the special figure change display game is running, the normal figure change display game is running, the special game state, or the normal figure hit state The condition may not be satisfied. Alternatively, the condition may be that the customer is waiting. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

  Although the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability set value change state ends, the RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the RAM 111C is abnormal.

  Although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting values in the present embodiment. The values in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C take values from 0 to 5. The same applies to the work probability set value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability set values corresponding to the values in the probability set value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in setting 1 to setting 6, respectively.

  FIG. 35B shows an example in which the assignment of the probability values is different. In this example, probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability values in three stages. Except for this, it is the same as FIG. In this way, when the six-stage probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be changed, and the design can be easily changed.

  It is to be noted that which probability value is assigned to which probability value is arbitrary. For example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. By operating the set value change button, the value of the probability set value area (work probability set value area) is updated by +1. Therefore, by changing the assignment, the order of the probability values changed when the set value change button is operated is different. Order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to two probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be four, and any one of one to six stages can be used.

  FIG. 35C also shows an example in which the assignment of the probability values is different. In this example, the settings 4 to 6 in FIG. 35B are changed to the settings 1 to 3 and the display on the probability set value display device 153 is set to 1 to 3 correspondingly. Thereby, the display of the probability set value display device 153 corresponds to the probability value, and the person in charge of the work can easily grasp the probability value.

  FIG. 35D also shows an example in which the assignment of the probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, only one probability value can be set substantially, and even when the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is displayed on the probability set value display device 153. However, the specific display (for example, blank display) is performed as described above, so that the operation is performed. It becomes easier for the worker to understand that the reception has been made.

  Although the number of values in the probability set value area is six, other numbers may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35B and 35C, the number of values in the probability set value area may be three. Also, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability set value area may be one. In addition, the number of values in the probability set value area may be set to 7 or more in order to enable a larger number of stages to be set. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

  In addition, although the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability set value, the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is changed in accordance with the change of the probability set value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be determined independently. However, when only a big hit and a small hit are to be obtained as a result of the special figure change display game, it is necessary to set a small hit probability value according to the big hit probability value. In addition, a probability setting value for setting a big hit probability value and a probability setting value for setting a small hit probability value may be separately set. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of a hit result of the normal figure change display game may be set according to a probability set value that defines a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

  In addition, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. Alternatively, the setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has been subjected to termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and reduce costs. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability varying function, an operating probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine according to the present modification, the game control device 100 transmits a command to instruct payout to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

  The payout control device 200 according to the present modified example includes a storage unit that can hold the stored content even when the power is shut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. As described above, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the storage content in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage unit of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means, based on receiving the payout command. In this way, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, thereby preventing the profit of the player from being spoiled. it can.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to notifying that the change of the probability set value is to be performed, the effect that the payout is likely to be performed is also performed. May be. In addition, transmission of the payout command (specific information) to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above-described case. For example, in the case of transmitting a command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. In step S40) or when transmitting a command for initializing the RAM to the effect control device 300 (step S44), a command (specific information) of a payout instruction may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, Game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of a game based on information from the game control means, and a probability value used for a lottery of a game are assigned. Setting means (selection means) for selecting the set probability value from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). A game control device 100) and a payout control device (payout control device 200) for performing control of paying out game media based on payout information from the game control device. A storage unit (RAM 111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is shut off, and a validity determination unit (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on is valid. And initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value, and is stored in the storage means by the validity determination means. When it is determined that the information is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the game control, and the effect control means sets the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is capable of holding the stored contents even in a power-off state, and comprises payout information storage means capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and When signal, and it has to perform control to pay out game media based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to return to a normal state, and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. When the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game arcade is also lost, and the initial value is set. However, the initialization that is performed by prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the probability that the probability setting value that the gaming shop does not intend remains from being set.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability set value are prepared.

[Probability set value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In the probability set value changing process, a fixed condition monitoring process (step S450) for monitoring whether a condition for fixing the selected probability set value is satisfied is performed.

[Fixed condition monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the determination condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end standby flag (step S457), performs the processing of steps S412 to S415, and ends the fixed condition monitoring processing.

  That is, when the operator performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first determination condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end wait flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition, as described later. In this example, the second confirmation condition is satisfied when the first confirmation condition is satisfied on the condition of an input from the touch switch. Is no longer necessary, so that the end standby flag is cleared.

  On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second confirmation condition has already been started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S452).

  If the setting key switch is not in the OFF state (step S452; N), the determination condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability set value change state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).

  Thereafter, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing after step S457 is performed, and the fixed condition monitoring processing ends. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch for performing the second operation, the second determination condition is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability set value selected when either the first fixed condition or the second fixed condition is satisfied is set as the probability set value to be used for the game. Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability set value is stored in the work probability set value area, and the information in the probability set value area in which the probability set value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, if the power is turned off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability set value is discarded, and the original probability set value is set.

  In the probability set value change state, the fact that the selected probability set value is set by touching the operation handle 24 may be notified. This notification may be always performed in the probability set value change state, or may be performed only in the state where the end standby flag is set. Further, the first fixing condition and the second fixing condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be that only the setting key switch is turned off. Alternatively, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and the selected probability setting value may be set when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

  Although the original probability set value is set when the power is turned off before the determination condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability set value may be set. For example, the information of the probability set value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability set value change state, and when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the initial value is set. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value. For example, the same probability setting value as that set when the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is initialized is used. It may be a set value.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151)), wherein the setting means determines that one of the plurality of determination conditions is satisfied. That is, the probability setting value selected on the basis of this is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of determination conditions, the degree of freedom of work is increased, and work efficiency in a game arcade can be increased.

  Further, the setting means does not set the selected probability set value if the power is cut off before any of the plurality of confirmation conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

  In addition, the plurality of determination conditions include a first determination condition and a second determination condition, wherein the first determination condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second determination condition is that the first operation is performed. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not include a setting key operation section in the setting means, and does not include the setting key switch 152. Also, the condition for shifting to the changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed is different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed-up information is normal and the probability set value is not in the changed state (step S21; N), it is determined whether the set value change switch is on from the state of the third input port 124 previously read. Is determined (step S61).

  If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process shifts to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to perform a process when the power supply is normally restored. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), a shift determination process is performed (step S62). As described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether or not a transition condition to a probability set value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, a probability set value changing flag is set. .

  When the probability set value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process proceeds to the process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability set value change state in which the set value can be changed. The process moves to step S35 of No. 6. In this modification, the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination processing, so that the processing in step S37 may not be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S63; N), the process shifts to step S41 in FIG. 6 to perform a process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

  On the other hand, if the backed-up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), it is determined whether the setting value change switch is on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier. Is determined (step S64). If the setting value change switch is not on (step S64; N), a command (specific information) of a setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), and RAM access is prohibited. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  If the setting value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), a shift determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination processing is the same processing as step S62. If the probability set value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), the RAM is initialized and the probability set value change state is set so that the probability set value can be changed. The process moves to step S35 in FIG. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

(Transition determination processing)
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination processing (steps S62 and S65) in the above-described main processing. In this transition determination processing, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

  In the present modified example, the clerk can shift to the probability set value changing state by inserting the game ball into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is changed. It is determined from the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal is input whether the transition condition is satisfied. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability set value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination processing ends. As a result, the state shifts to the probability set value change state.

  If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). . If the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination processing ends. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination processing ends without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 6 in order to initialize the RAM area for game control, and when the backed up data is abnormal, Means that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

  Note that the transition condition may be changeable at the game store or may not be changeable. Further, although the transition condition is such that game balls are put in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in a predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detecting means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, the condition may be that only detection is performed by the detection unit, or that the detection unit performs detection a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (the number of detections, the detection interval, and the like). .

  Further, although the detection sensor for the winning area is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 and the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection unit that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor for a winning area.

  Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition. The transition is performed when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, a keyboard may be provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and may be used as a detection unit used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by a password input from the keyboard. .

  Further, the transition to the probability set value change state is enabled by monitoring the satisfaction of the transition condition only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the game machine is powered on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not in the ON state, the transition to the probability set value change state may be enabled by monitoring the satisfaction of the shift condition. In this case, the period for monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be always set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power-on. May be started to monitor the establishment of.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player, The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are determined. Setting means (gaming control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) And the setting means enables selection of a probability set value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode.Therefore, the detection of the predetermined mode by the detecting means has the same function as the setting key, so that it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can execute the change of the probability set value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the work of changing the probability set value can be simultaneously performed on a plurality of gaming machines. Is improved.

  In addition, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the result of the game is a special result, the game is used in a game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a), and a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned A setting unit (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on operation of an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means is configured to enable selection of a probability set value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. . Therefore, the detection of the predetermined mode by the detecting means has the same function as the setting key, so that it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can execute the change of the probability set value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the work of changing the probability set value can be simultaneously performed on a plurality of gaming machines. Is improved.

  The setting means enables selection of the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

  Further, the plurality of detection means are inoperable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modified example, the change of the probability set value is performed by the set value change operation unit constituted by the dip switch.

  The DIP switch serving as a setting value change operation unit is provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and the input state is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and states of the DIP switches corresponding to the respective probability set values are defined.

[Probability set value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability set value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461). (Step S462). Thereby, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Becomes

  By using the dip switch in this manner, the work of setting a desired probability set value is facilitated, and the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover for covering the DIP switch may be attachable so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately seen when the front frame 12 is opened.

  Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch, and the LED may be turned on when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. The confirmation LED may be lit at all times, or may be lit only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

  Further, the set value change operation unit is not limited to the dip switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary switch, and any type that can grasp the probability set value by visually checking the state of each switch. May be something.

  Further, the probability set value changing state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152, but the state can be shifted to the probability set value changing state according to the state of the set value changing switch 151 as in the third modified example, and the predetermined time is set. The probability set value change state may end when the time elapses. In this case, the probability set value may be set based on the state of the set value change operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the set value change operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. A probability setting value may be set.

  Also, when the state is not the probability set value change state, the currently set probability set value is compared with the state of the set value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether both states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time, such as when power is turned on or when a special figure variation display game is started. Moreover, you may make it perform regularly at fixed time intervals. If it is determined by the monitoring process that the states do not match, a notification that an abnormality has occurred may be made, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game cannot be performed when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 for changing the probability set value and the CPU 111A is broken. .

  In this modified example, a setting sub-board is provided as a setting means including a set value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability set value display device 153, and the like, and the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154. Here, illustration of the set value change switch 151 is omitted.

  FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed, the input to the CPU 111A is set to LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the state is not changed to the probability set value change state, and the game can be advanced. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED is provided as confirmation means for visually recognizing the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

  FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position, and the probability setting value change state is set on condition that the input from the setting key switch 152 is on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes specific operation information that is input based on the operation of the operation unit being set to the specific state, and based on the input of the specific operation information. It becomes a probability set value change state in which a probability set value can be selected. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot be advanced, and the game can be advanced by ending the probability set value change state.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows a case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In any case, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on.

  That is, since the state becomes the same as when the probability set value can be changed, the specific operation information is also input in this case. As a result, the state is changed to the probability set value change state and the game cannot be advanced. As described above, the specific operation information is input even in the case of disconnection or disconnection of the connector, whereby it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of an abnormality. Further, since the confirmation means is turned on even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

  Here, the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 has been described, but they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Also, the setting sub-board, which constitutes the setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like, is provided separately from the game control device 100. However, the setting key switch 152 and the like are provided in the game control device 100 to set the setting means. May be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case as well, it is possible to detect disconnection or disconnection of the connector between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A by a similar configuration.

  Here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted. However, when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is interrupted, the specific operation information is input. Information may be input. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control, and a probability set value which is connected to the control means and to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned, are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151), and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on the fact, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability set value can be selected, and the control means can proceed with the game while the specific operation information is input. It is configured not performed, if the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, so that the specific operation information to the control means has to be entered. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

  Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, the probability set value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, a probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation process, when a game is being played (step S433; Y), the OFF state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. When the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434). When the setting key switch is not on (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. (Step S473), and ends the probability set value confirmation processing. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch is in the off state when the game is not being played.

  If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether there is an OFF state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), and the processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, if there is no off-state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not being played, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode, and the setting key switch is switched from the off state while the game is not being performed. When the state changes to the ON state, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability set value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept on from during the game, the intention during the game in which the transition to the probability set value confirmation mode is prohibited is prohibited. If the setting key switch is in the ON state without being set, it is possible to prevent a state in which the game is not being played thereafter (a state not in the prohibition state) and the mode is shifted to the probability set value check mode and the probability set value is displayed. . That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when operated with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

  As described above, the setting unit (the game control device 100) operates the operation unit (the setting key operation unit (the setting key switch 152)) when the state of the game controlled by the control unit (the game control device 100) is not the prohibited state. That is, the confirmation state is set only when the state is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally indicated.

[Seventh modification]
Next, a seventh variation of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification includes a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit as a first operation unit and a set value change button as a second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. The RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main process, if the RAM clear switch is in the ON state (the RAM clear button is pressed down) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is, the RAM clear switch forms an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability set value change processing]
Also, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 46 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change processing, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processing after step S412 is performed to determine the selected probability setting value. Do.

  As described above, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, and the probability set value can be determined by the RAM clear button. The work of determining the probability set value can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the probability set value change state and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability set value is changed. Since only the initialization of the RAM can be performed without shifting to the state, when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state. Therefore, the work efficiency at the game store can be improved.

  From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch) )), When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated, the storage unit (RAM 111C) ) Can be initialized. Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability set value can be determined.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a gaming value. A control means (game control device 100) and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to a first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and a second operation unit (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value changing switch 151) and a third operation section (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)); Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for control of the game by the control means including information on the probability set value selected by the means; State, an open state, a main body frame (front frame 12), and open / close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the main body frame. When the game machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated while the open / close detection unit detects that the game machine is in the open state, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is set. Is initialized by the opening / closing detection unit when the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the third operation unit being operated, the probability set value is set. This means that the storage means is initialized without making the change possible. Therefore, when only the initialization of the RAM is desired to be performed, it is not necessary to perform the operation of changing the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved.

  Further, the control means, when the main body frame is in the open state is detected by the open / close detection means, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the first operation part and the third operation part being operated, The probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the main body frame is in the closed state, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and the first operation part and the third operation part are operated. If the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the state in which the probability setting value is changed, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability set value to a possible state. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change state, and it is possible to increase the work efficiency in the game arcade. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, the state does not shift to the probability set value changing state, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  In FIG. 45, the state of the setting key switch is performed prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch, so that the state shifts to the probability set value changing state even when the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are simultaneously operated. However, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear switch is on may be used as the condition for shifting to the probability set value change state. By using a plurality of operation units as conditions, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value change state.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment which does not include the RAM clear button, the state in which the main body frame is in the open state is detected by the open / close detection means, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the closed state, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation section and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. It can be said that. Also in this case, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the setting value changing switch is on may be used as the condition for shifting to the probability setting value changing state.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation unit. The setting means can determine the selected probability set value by operating the third operation unit.

  In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be interchanged. That is, if there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the process from step S407 is performed to change the selected probability set value, and if there is an input from the set value change switch, the process from step S412 is performed. Alternatively, a process of determining the selected probability set value may be performed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification is different in the operation of determining the probability set value.

[Probability set value change processing]
In this modification, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability set value change process, when the set value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the process from step S407 is performed to change the selected probability set value. When the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the process from step S412 is performed, and the process for fixing the selected probability set value is performed.

  Here, the first input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined period of time, and the first input mode is present when the pressing is completed. To judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the hand is released from the set value change button due to a short press operation (when the set value change switch 151 is turned off). The reason why the hand is released from the set value change button is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

  Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time or more, and the second input mode is provided when the predetermined time has elapsed. To judge. That is, the probability setting value is determined when there is a long-time pressing operation exceeding the specified time (when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

  As described above, the probability set value can be selected and confirmed by the set value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the set value change button is pressed. The operation of changing and confirming the set value and the operation of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, so that the operation efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. Note that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-described operations, and any operation may be used as long as the operation can be determined.

  From the above, the setting unit (game control device 100) is configured to operate a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM 111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability set value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. It will be.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a description will be given of a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, a probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In the probability setting value confirmation process, when a game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation processing is terminated and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  The predetermined abnormality can be arbitrarily set, but in this case, it is illegal for the magnet, illegal for the electric wave of the panel, illegal for the electric wave of the frame, illegal for the ordinary telephone, and illegal for the special winning opening. If any of these abnormalities are occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by wrongdoing.If such abnormalities occur, do not shift to the probability setting check mode, so that the person who commits the wrongdoing will know the probability set value. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the switch abnormality due to the disconnection of the connector or the like, a shot ball out error, an overflow error, a dispensing abnormality error, and a glass frame opening error are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified to the game store side. It is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known before the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality is received and the attendant checks it.

  This security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started, so as to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the gaming machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal exceeding a predetermined time.

  In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode.However, the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated while being kept in the ON state, the mode shifts to the probability set value check mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically checked when all the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated, so that the efficiency of the checking operation can be improved.

  Further, by applying the configuration of the above-described sixth modification, the mode is switched to the probability set value check mode only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You may do it. In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared.

  As described above, when the setting key switch is kept in the ON state from the state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode, so that the mode cannot be shifted to the probability set value check mode. If the setting key switch is inadvertently turned on in a state where a predetermined abnormality that is a state has occurred, then the state becomes a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved (a state not a prohibition state), and the probability setting value is set. It is possible to prevent the display of the probability set value from being shifted to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when operated with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)). It is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is set to a predetermined state. Even in the state so that the was to avoid a confirmation state. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode in accordance with the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by indicating the probability set value.

  Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine. This means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the information is eliminated. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and to notify the outside that the probability set value cannot be confirmed, and the probability set value is indicated. This can prevent inconvenience.

  Further, a storage unit (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game is provided, and the control unit stores the specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage unit is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. This means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

  In addition, the setting unit sets the operation unit to the predetermined state in a state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred, and when all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved while being in the predetermined state, all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved. Thus, the confirmation state is set based on this. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically checked when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the checking operation can be improved.

  In addition, the setting means sets the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in a state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally indicated.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, a probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation processing, when the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S511). If the game is not being played (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

  On the other hand, when the game is being played (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the routine goes to a step S435. As a result, the mode can be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is suspended during the probability set value confirmation mode.

  After performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game has not been interrupted, the probability set value confirmation processing ends. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game is set to restart (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability set value is set. The confirmation processing ends. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode is restarted.

  In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game or the ordinary figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. Further, a display indicating that the apparatus is in a suspended state may be displayed on the collective display device 50.

  In addition, when the game is interrupted, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is restarted, a restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable role. The display on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

  Even during the interruption of the game, winning in the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 38 may be made valid or invalid. The payout of the game balls may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[Eleventh Modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is configured to output a sound accompanying a change in the probability set value.

  FIG. 50A shows an example of a case where the probability set value is changed. When the power of the gaming machine is off, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the setting is performed. The value is changed (t12). Based on the change to the set value state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of changing the probability setting to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is changed based on the reception of this command. To output a change notification sound. As the notification sound during change, any sound may be used, and for example, a sound saying “probability setting value is being changed”, a specific music or a warning sound may be mentioned. Also, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 inform the fact that the probability set value is being changed. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display “Probability setting value is being changed”. That is, the effect setting device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value has been changed. By performing notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability set value has been changed, and even if the probability set value is incorrectly changed during business hours, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding area It is possible for the player to notice and prevent an unauthorized game from being played.

  Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn the setting key switch into the off state, the probability set value change state ends (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, a command of the probability setting change end is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs setting for a predetermined period (for example, three minutes) based on the reception of this command. A probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information on the set probability setting value is output (t13 to t14). After that, a sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

  Although any sound may be used as the probability set value notification sound, a sound corresponding to the set probability set value is output, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, when the probability set value is 1, a voice saying “probability set value 1 has been set” is output. Of course, other sounds may be used, or specific music or alarm sounds may be used. The display according to the probability set value similarly set is also performed on the display device 41. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a display “probability setting value 1 has been set” is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

  In addition, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified of the probability set value as being in accordance with the set probability set value. You may do it. In other words, the probability setting value is notified using the effect device used in the game. By performing notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability set value has been changed, and even if the probability set value is incorrectly changed during business hours, the salesclerk of the game store or the surrounding game The player can be aware of this, and it can be prevented that an illegal game is played.

  In addition, when the state is the probability set value change state, external information indicating that the state is the probability set value change state is output, so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the state is the probability set value changed state. Is also good. Similarly, when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode, external information indicating that the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode is output, and it is confirmed that the external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability set value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. In this way, the game shop can immediately recognize the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. In addition, the probability set value notification sound may be output over a period during which the game cannot be advanced. In this way, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business hours, the game cannot be played immediately, and the illegal progress of the game can be prevented. Further, when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode, the speaker 19a, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the panel decoration device 46, the board production device The notification may be made by an effect device such as 44.

  Further, each time the probability set value is updated by an operation in the probability set value change state, a sound corresponding to the updated probability set value may be output. Further, other effect devices may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player, Control means (game control device 100) for performing control; and setting means (game control) for enabling selection of a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating an operation unit. Device 100) and effect devices (speakers 19a and 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, and board effect device 44) for performing a game effect. The set probability value can be notified by the effect device. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be prevented. Further, the effect that the probability set value can be changed can be notified by the effect device. In addition, it can be notified by the effect device that the probability set value can be confirmed.

  Further, after the probability set value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business hours, the game cannot be played immediately, and the game can be prevented from being illegally advanced.

As described above, in the process of generating the special game state and the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, and wins the big winning. Control is performed so that game balls can flow into the mouth. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening, or until a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the special winning opening, a special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) of continuing (repeating) this a predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, during a special game state (big hit game state) or a small hit game state, a predetermined number of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from opening of the special winning opening. A round game for opening the special winning opening is executed a predetermined number of times until such a condition is achieved.
FIG. 51 to FIG. 61 are flowcharts illustrating a process of generating a special game state and a small hitting game state.

[Grand Winner Switch Monitoring]
The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening process is being performed (step A201). .
If the special winning opening is being processed (Y in step A201), the process proceeds to step A205. When the special winning opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A201). A202).

If the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning game remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting medium processing is being performed (step A203). .
If the small hitting process is being performed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not during the small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204).
Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number.

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing ends. If the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.
In step A205, "0" is set in the winning counter (step A205). Then, it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the two special winning opening switches 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other of the two special winning opening switches 38a) (step A210). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other of the two special winning opening switches 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215).
If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A215; Y), the special winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the special winning port remaining ball is not being processed (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is changed to the big win. It is added to the mouth count (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning opening count is equal to or more than an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "10") (step A218).

If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. When the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A219). (Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221).
If the small hit is not being processed (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. The value of the opening operation end is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 52, in the process of the fanfare / interval, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). And effect command setting processing (step A903).

Next, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A905). It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the special winning game opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for the short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A907), and the process proceeds to Step A909. If the number of rounds is not greater than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning game opening timer (for example, 29 seconds) for the long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It saves (step A908) and shifts to the processing of step A909.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening information 1 (4R: all open short), the special opening opening information 2 (16R: all open long), and the special winning opening as the special opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern. Open mouth information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), special winning opening information 4 (4R: all open long), special winning opening information 5 (16R: all open long), Special winning opening information 6 (16R: 1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), and special winning opening opening information 7 (16R: 1-4R is long opening, 5-16R is short opening) are set. ing.
Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening information 1 data and the open switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening information 2 data and the open switching determination value “16” are stored in the special winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the winning opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the winning opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.

In step A909, the processing number is set to "4" relating to the processing during opening of the special winning opening (step A909). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A910).
Next, a signal relating to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A911), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A912). Thereafter, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A913), and the processing during the fanfare / interval ends.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 53, in the special winning opening processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the last round (step A1001).

If it is not the final round (Step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (Step A1002), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (Step A1003), and the special game state is set. It is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command relating to an interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011.

  On the other hand, if it is the last round (step A1001; Y), the final ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. An ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the time is prepared (step A1009), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011.

  In step A1011, the processing number is set to "5" relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A1011). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1012). Thereafter, in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the special fluctuation winning device 38, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1013), and the special winning opening is opened. The middle processing ends.

(Grand Winner Remaining Ball Processing)
Next, the details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 54, in the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the last round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the last round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired. (Step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (Step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is greater than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 is performed. Move to the processing of. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that notifies that a subsequent round will be a short open round. More specifically, as special winning opening information indicating the jackpot pattern, special opening opening information 2 (16R: all open long) and special opening opening information 3 (16R: 1-4R are long open, 5-16R are open When any one of the short hits is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and a round continuation notification effect is executed at the fourth round. If the selected special winning opening information is the special winning opening information 2, it is notified that the long opening will continue in the round continuation notification effect, and the special winning opening will be opened with the long opening even in the 5R and subsequent rounds. You. Also, if the selected special winning opening information is the special winning opening information 3, it is notified that the rank-down effect is performed and the short opening is performed in the round continuous notification effect, and the special winning opening in the 5th round and subsequent rounds. The mouth is opened with a short opening.

If the special winning opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A1107). A1108), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 2R, 4R, and 8R may be provided.

  In step A1109, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109). Thereafter, a processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set to “3” (step A1110), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1111), and a special winning opening (special variable winning device) 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1112), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the last round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1113), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1114), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A1115).

Next, "6" is set as the processing number relating to the jackpot ending processing (step A1116), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1117), and the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38). (For example, turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (step A1118).
Next, the information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1119), and the information in the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1120). Then, the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1121). After that, the information in the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step A1122), and the information of the special winning opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is cleared. The information is cleared (step A1123), and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 55, in the big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data set at the time of starting the fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the time saving operation data (Step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (Step A1202), and if it is the time saving operation data (Step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (Step A1203). .

Next, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of starting the change (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).
Next, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1206), the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM. The next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired in the area (step A1207), and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1208).

Next, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed. .
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed, and a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared ( (Step A1214), effect command setting processing (step A1215) is performed.
Next, after the end of the big hit, it is determined whether there is a time reduction (step A1216). If there is a time reduction (step A1216; Y), the process proceeds to step A1219. If there is no time reduction (step A1216; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A1217), and after effect command setting processing (step A1218) is performed, the flow proceeds to the processing of step A1219.

In step A1219, “0” is set as the process number related to the special map ordinary process (step A1219). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1220).
Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off one signal of the jackpot, turning off three signals of the jackpot, and turning off four signals of the jackpot) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (eg, The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off.) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).
Next, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1223), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1224), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1224). Step A1225). Thereafter, the information in the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1226), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1227), and the big hit end processing ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) in the above big hit end processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving (for example, two big hits are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a high probability & Signals related to the start of the absence (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, The normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), and the low probability and no time reduction flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1236).
Next, a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1237), and the display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) during right-handing is set. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1238), and the big hit end setting processing 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure change display game becomes the high probability state (probable change state) and is not the time reduction state. In addition, by setting an initial value (for example, 100) in the high-probability variation count area, the high-probability state ends by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above big hit end process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, two big hits is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1241). The signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form since it is output from the middle of the big hit.
Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability & shortening of time (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction) The state signal is turned on, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned on, and the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal is turned on) and saved in the test signal output data area (step A1242). ).

  Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A1243), the high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1244), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1245). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1246), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure change display game becomes the high probability state (probable change state) and the time saving state. In addition, by setting an initial value (for example, 100) in the high-probability variation count area, the high-probability state ends by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time reduction state, but the right-handed mode is set from the special game state.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, first, “8” related to the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1302).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hitting game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1303), and a signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric accessory 1) The operation signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1304).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1305). Thereafter, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1306), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting medium control pointer area. (Step A1307), the processing during the small hit fanfare ends.

[Small hit processing]
Next, the details of the small hit processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the small hitting process, first, the value of the small hitting control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and is the loaded value equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (for example, “6”)? Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag indicates that the special figure high probability It is determined whether or not the flag is related (step A1406). In this way, it is determined whether the small hit occurs during the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the employee is in the time saving state.
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and effect command setting processing (step A1408) is performed. The process moves to the process of step A1409.

  In step A1409, "9" relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1409). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1410). Thereafter, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1411), and the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1412). The hit processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the small hit mid-process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59, in the small hit operation shift setting process, a branch process (step A1421) is performed according to the control pointer (the small hit control pointer).

If the control pointer is "0", "2", or "4" in step A1421, the wait time (for example, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1422). The OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1423), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.
If the control pointer is "1", "3", or "5" in step A1421, the special winning game opening time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1424), the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1425), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fan fare time of 300 ms, the opening of 200 ms and the closing of 1500 ms are alternately performed. Be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms release (that is, at the time of switching from the first 200 ms release to the first 1500 ms close), the small hitting control pointer is updated to “0” and 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closing (ie, at the time of switching from the first 1500 ms closing to the second 200 ms opening), the small hit control pointer is updated to “1”, and the second 200 ms opening is performed. At the end, the small hit control pointer is updated to "2", at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, the small hit control pointer is updated to "3", and at the end of the third 200 ms opening, the small hit control The pointer is updated to "4", and the small hit control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. At the end of the fourth 200 ms release, the small hit control pointer is updated to "6", and after the short hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 ms, the small hit is reached. The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 ms, the shutter is closed for 2000 ms, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 60, in the small hit remaining ball processing, first, "10" relating to the small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step A1501), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1502).

  Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1503), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1504). Thereafter, the information of the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step A1505), the information of the small hit control pointer area is cleared (for example, cleared to 0) (step A1506), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the small hit end processing, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603) and set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information is obtained (step A1604).

Next, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM. It saves in the area (step A1606), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609).
If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

On the other hand, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1610), An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared (step A1612), an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed, and a high probability change number command corresponding to the high probability change number is prepared (step A1613). (Step A1614), effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after effect command setting processing (step A1618) is performed, the processing proceeds to step A1619. Transition.

In step A1619, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619). Then, it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure time saving (during the time saving state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to during special figure time saving (step A1620; Y), the flow shifts to the process of step A1623. If the loaded flag is not the flag for special figure time saving (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1620). A1621) In order to turn off the display LED during right strike (for example, the first game state display unit 57), the number in left strike state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the process proceeds to step A1623. Move on to processing.

In step A1623, “0” related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (step A1623). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1624). After that, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, turning off one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1625), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hitting signal). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1626).
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1627), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1628), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1629). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1630), and the small hit ending processing ends.

<Over-prize information presentation>
The gaming machine 10 can execute an over-prize notification effect for notifying the occurrence of an over-prize when an over-prize occurs in the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during the special game state. Here, the case where the over-winning to the special winning opening occurs when the number of game balls that have won to the special winning opening during one round game exceeds the maximum winning number (for example, 10).
As shown in FIG. 62, for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the over-prize notification effect of the present embodiment includes an over-prize notification effect in a first notification mode (first effect mode) and an over-prize notification in a second notification mode (second effect mode). There is an effect and an over-prize notification effect of the third notification mode (third effect mode).

The over-prize notification effect in the first notification mode can notify (suggest) the occurrence of an over-prize. In the present embodiment, there are two types of first notification modes, Type 1 and Type 2, but of course, the types of the first notification mode are not limited to two types. That is, the type of the first notification mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
The over-prize notification effect in the second notification mode can notify (suggest) the occurrence of an over-prize, and also report (suggest) the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure change display game will be a special result as a pre-reading notice. In the present embodiment, there are four types of second notification modes, types 1 to 4, but, of course, the types of the second notification modes are not limited to four types. That is, the type of the second notification mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
The over-prize notification effect in the third notification mode can notify (suggest) the occurrence of an over-prize, and report (suggest) the currently set probability setting value. In the present embodiment, there are four types of the third notification mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the third notification mode are not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the third notification mode may be one type or a plurality of types.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a process related to an over-prize notification effect.
The effect control device 300 executes the decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41, and displays the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game according to the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game. indicate.
During the execution of the decoration special figure change display game, the display device 41 includes, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), a decoration special figure change display game display section 41a for displaying the decoration special figure change display game, and an undigested display. A first standby hold display section 41b1 for displaying a decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory, and a second standby hold display for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory. The display unit 41b2, the on-hold display unit 41c for displaying information on the start memory during the digestion (the start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure variation display game), and the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 41a A small symbol variable display section 41d for variably displaying a small symbol relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification information) that is variably displayed, and a number holding display section 41e for displaying the number of unstarted start memories by numbers. Is provided .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), for example, when the result of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the decorative special figure variable display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300, at the start of the special game state, With reference to the notification mode distribution table, the notification mode of the over-winning-prize notification effect executed during the special game state is determined based on the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game. Thereafter, the type of the notification mode is determined with reference to the type distribution table corresponding to the determined notification mode.

FIG. 64A shows an example of the notification mode distribution table. In the notification mode distribution table, a notification mode of an over-winning-prize notification effect is set for each result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
Here, in the present embodiment, there are twelve types of special decorations, that is, patterns 1 to 9 having numbers as symbol identification portions and symbols A to C having character portions as symbol identification portions. In the variable display game, symbols 1 to 9 and symbols A to C are variably displayed in a predetermined order in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a. In addition, the special result mode (big hit result mode) of the decoration special figure change display game includes a special result mode consisting of a general pattern (symbols 1 to 9) and a special pattern (symbols A to C). There is a special result mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is even-numbered symbols (“2, 2, 2”, “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, “8, 8, 8 "), the first notification mode is selected as the notification mode of the over-winning-prize notification effect executed during the special game state based on the special result mode. If the result mode of the decorative special figure change display game is the special result mode composed of the slots of the symbol 7 ("7, 7, 7"), the second notification mode is selected, and the decorative special figure change display game is performed. Special result in which the result mode of the odd pattern other than symbol 7 consists of zoro eyes (“1,1,1”, “3,3,3”, “5,5,5”, “9,9,9”) In the case of the mode, the third notification mode is selected. In addition, if the result mode of the decorative special figure change display game is the special result mode including the special pattern A (symbol A), the first notification mode is selected, and the result mode of the decorative special figure change display game is changed. In the case of the special result mode composed of the special pattern B (symbol B), the second notification mode is selected, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special pattern C (symbol C). In the case of the special result mode, the third notification mode is selected.
In the example illustrated in FIG. 64A, the second notification mode is most difficult to be selected. However, the selection rate of the notification mode is not limited thereto, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the third notification mode <the second notification mode It may be higher in the order of the mode <first notification mode.

When the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is determined to be the first notification mode, the effect control device 300 refers to the type distribution table of the first notification mode, and based on the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game. Then, the type of the first notification mode is determined.
FIG. 64B (a) shows an example of the type distribution table of the first notification mode. The type and the corresponding type selectivity are set in the type distribution table of the first notification mode for each result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
In the example shown in FIG. 64B (a), when the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special result mode having even-numbered symbols, the type 1 ("Wow!") Is the type 2 ("Wow!"). Type 2 ("Sure!") Is easier to select than "Sure!", And if the result form of the decorative special figure variable display game is a special result form consisting of the special pattern A's slotted eyes. 1 ("Wow!").

In addition, when the notification mode of the over-winning-prize notification effect is determined to be the second notification mode, the effect control device 300 determines whether there is an uncompleted start memory.
If there is no unstarted start memory, the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is determined to be the first notification mode instead of the second notification mode, and the type of the first notification mode is, for example, the type 2 ("as expected!").
On the other hand, when there is an unstarted start memory, the result becomes a big hit in the unstarted start memory based on the prefetch result information (the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command) from the game control device 100. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory (a start memory corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit).

Then, if there is no start memory that results in a big hit in the unstarted start memories, a reach system corresponding to the unstarted start memories is acquired based on the pre-read result information from the game control device 100. When there are a plurality of undigested start memories, for example, the reach system having the highest expectation among them is acquired. Thereafter, the type of the second notification mode is determined based on the obtained reach system with reference to the type distribution table of the second notification mode for the loss.
On the other hand, when there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the unstarted start memory, the reach corresponding to the undigested start memory in which the result is the big hit is based on the look-ahead result information from the game control device 100. Get strains. When there are a plurality of undigested starting memories that result in a big hit, for example, a reach system having the highest expectation among them is acquired. Thereafter, the type of the second notification mode is determined based on the obtained reach system with reference to the type distribution table of the second notification mode for the big hit.

FIG. 64B (b) shows an example of the type distribution table of the second notification mode for the loss, and FIG. 64B (c) shows an example of the type distribution table of the second notification mode for the big hit. In the type distribution table of the second notification mode, a type and a corresponding type selectivity are set for each reach system. In the examples shown in FIGS. 64B (b) and 64 (c), the higher the degree of expectation of the reach system is, the easier it is to select a type having a higher degree of expectation.
Type 4 of the second notification mode (“congratulations!”) Is selected only when there is a startup memory in which the result is a big hit in unstarted startup memories, so that over-winning is achieved in type 4 of the second notification mode. By executing the notification effect, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the over-winning prize, and to definitely suggest that the start memory that has not been digested includes a start memory having a big hit (see FIG. 62).

In addition, when the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is determined to be the third notification mode, the effect control device 300 acquires the currently set probability setting value.
The effect control device 300, for example, based on a command (see step S421 in FIG. 11) of the end of the probability setting change transmitted from the game control device 100, stores information (currently set in the storage means (FeRAM 323, etc.)). Is set to be updated. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can acquire the currently set probability setting value from the storage unit. Thereafter, the type of the third notification mode is determined based on the obtained probability setting value with reference to the type distribution table of the third notification mode.
FIG. 64B (d) shows an example of the type distribution table of the third notification mode. The type and the corresponding type selectivity are set in the type distribution table of the third notification mode for each probability setting value.
Since the third notification mode type 4 (“congratulations!”) Is selected only when the probability set value is “6”, by executing the over-prize notification effect in the third notification mode type 4 The occurrence of an over-winning prize can be notified and the probability setting value can be definitely suggested to be “6” (see FIG. 62).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred.
The effect control device 300, for example, based on the round command (see step A902 in FIG. 52) transmitted from the game control device 100, the information (large winning opening count number) stored in the storage means (FeRAM323 etc.) In addition to clearing to 0, based on the special winning opening count command (see steps A207 and A211 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the game control device 100, the information (the special winning opening count number) stored in the storage means (such as the FeRAM 323). ) Is updated by +1. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can determine whether or not an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred based on the information stored in the storage means.
Alternatively, when it is determined in the special winning opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 51) that the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A218; Y), the gaming control device 100 sets the special winning opening count number to the upper limit value. A determination is made as to whether or not it is higher than the predetermined value. If it is determined that the value is higher, a command notifying that an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined that an over-winning to the winning opening has occurred.

Then, when it is determined that an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred, the effect control device 300 uses at least one of the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b as shown in FIG. 63 (b), for example. The over-prize notification effect of the notification mode and type determined at the start of the special game state is executed.
In the example illustrated in FIG. 63, the over-prize notification effect notification mode is determined to be the second notification mode, and the over-prize notification effect performed when the type of the second notification mode is determined to be type 3 is illustrated. ing. In other words, the over-prize notification effect is performed in the second notification mode type 3, and the dialogue image "That's hot!" Is displayed on the display device 41, and the sound "That's hot!" , 19b. Thereby, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the over prize and to indicate that the big hit expectation is high (see FIG. 62).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 62, the same over-winning-prize notification effect is performed when type 4 of the second notification mode is selected and when type 4 of the third notification mode is selected (that is, when the type 4 of the third notification mode is selected). A dialogue image “Congratulations!” Is displayed on the display device 41, and a sound “Congratulations!” Is output from the speakers 19a and 19b.) Thus, when the over-prize notification effect is performed, the player cannot grasp whether the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is the second notification mode or the third notification mode. In the case where the big hit is not hit (even if all the starting memories which have not been exhausted when the over-prize notification effect is executed) are not hit, the third notification mode is set (that is, the probability set value is “6”). It can be grasped, and the degree of expectation of the subsequent game is improved.

  In addition, it is also possible to configure so that the occurrence of the over prize is related to a specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs during the special game state, the display of the decoration special figure start storage display after the end of the special game state. A hold change effect of notifying (suggesting) the prefetch result by changing the mode may be executed. In addition, the phrase "involve the occurrence of an over-winning in a specific effect" is not limited to "If an over-winning occurs during the special-playing state, a hold-change effect is executed after the special-playing state." For example, it is possible to change the effect mode of the effect (round effect, interval effect, ending effect, round continuation effect, etc.) performed during the special game state when an over-winning prize occurs during the special game state. Make it ".

In addition, the effect control device 300 counts the number of times an over-winning has occurred in the special winning opening (the special variable winning device 38) since the start of the special gaming state, and determines the round game of the final round in the special gaming state. During the round effect corresponding to the above, an over winning evaluation effect for evaluating the number of over winnings that occurred in the special game state may be executed.
As shown in FIG. 65 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the over-winning evaluation effect includes an over-winning evaluation effect in a first evaluation mode (first effect mode) and an over-winning evaluation effect in a second evaluation mode (second effect mode). And an over-prize evaluation effect in the third evaluation mode (third effect mode).

The over-prize evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode can notify (indicate) the number of occurrences of over-prize in the special game state being executed, that is, the number of times of execution of the over-prize notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), there are two types of first evaluation modes, type 1 and type 2, but of course, the types of the first evaluation mode are not limited to two types. That is, the type of the first evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
In the over-prize evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode, the number of occurrences of over-prize in the special game state being executed is reported (suggested), and the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure change display game is a special result is notified as a pre-reading notice. (Suggest). In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), there are four types of the second evaluation mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the second evaluation mode are not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the second evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
In the over-prize evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode, the number of occurrences of over-prize in the special game state being executed can be reported (suggested) and the currently set probability set value can be reported (suggested). In the example illustrated in FIG. 65A, there are four types of the third evaluation mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the third evaluation mode are not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the third evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.

For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the over-winning evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode, a display device that displays a character image (for example, “the round of over-winning was ○ times!”) Is displayed. 41 is displayed. Then, the display mode of the character image is different between Type 1 and Type 2 of the first evaluation mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the over-prize evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode, a character image for notifying the number of occurrences of over-prize and a character image of the character A are displayed on the display device 41. The display mode of the character image is different for each of the types 1 to 4 of the second evaluation mode.
Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), for example, in the over-winning prize evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode, a character image notifying the number of occurrences of over-winning and a character image of the character B are displayed on the display device 41. The display mode of the character image is different for each of the types 1 to 4 of the third evaluation mode.

If the result of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the decorative special figure variable display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300 sets the evaluation mode distribution table (at the predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the special game state)). With reference to the illustration (not shown), the evaluation mode of the over-winning evaluation effect to be executed during the special game state is determined based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game).
Thereafter, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning prize evaluation effect is determined to be the first evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 refers to the type distribution table (not shown) of the first evaluation mode, and determines the predetermined condition (for example, the decoration The type of the first evaluation mode is determined based on the result mode of the special figure change display game).

Further, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning prize evaluation effect is determined to be the second evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an unstarted start memory.
When there is no unstarted start memory, the evaluation mode of the over-winning prize evaluation effect is determined to be the first evaluation mode instead of the second evaluation, and the type of the first evaluation mode is, for example, type 2 To decide.
On the other hand, when there is an unstarted start memory, the result becomes a big hit in the unstarted start memory based on the prefetch result information (the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command) from the game control device 100. It is determined whether there is a start memory.

If there is no start memory that results in a large hit in the unstarted start memories, the type distribution table (not shown) of the second evaluation mode for the loss is referred to and a predetermined condition (for example, undigested) is referred to. The type of the second evaluation mode is determined on the basis of the reach system corresponding to the start memory of (1).
On the other hand, if there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the unstarted start memories, the type distribution table (not shown) of the second evaluation mode for the big hit is referred to and a predetermined condition (for example, the undigested start memory) is referred to. The type of the second evaluation mode is determined based on the reach system corresponding to the starting memory).

Further, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning prize evaluation effect is determined to be the third evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 refers to the type distribution table (not shown) of the third evaluation mode, and sets the currently set probability. The type of the third evaluation mode is determined based on the set value.
Thereafter, during the execution of the round effect corresponding to the round game of the final round, the effect control device 300 uses the display device 41 to determine the evaluation mode and the type determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the special game state). The over-prize evaluation evaluation is performed.

  Here, the entire character image may be displayed in a display mode according to the determined type, or only a part (for example, a numeric portion) of the character image may be displayed in a display mode according to the determined type. Is also good. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), when type A of the first evaluation mode is selected and the number of over-winning rounds is five, the character “Over-winning round was five!” Each of the characters forming the column may be displayed in white, or only “5” of the characters forming the character string “Over-winning round was 5 times!” May be displayed in white. May be displayed in “other colors”. The “other color” is preferably a color that does not correspond to each type of evaluation mode, such as black (colors other than white, blue, green, and red in the example shown in FIG. 65A). For example, when displaying only the numeral portion of the character image in a display mode according to the determined type, the numeral portion indicating the number of times of the over prize (or the number of times the over prize notification effect is executed) is replaced with another character. Since the characters are displayed in different display modes, attention can be paid to the numeral portion (that is, the portion indicating the information that the player wants to know most in the character image). Further, since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting by the display mode of the numeral portion, the interest in the over winning is improved.

The display mode according to the type includes not only color, but also transparency, font, angle (identity, italic, and the like), whether or not 3D can be recognized by the naked eye, character movement (whether or not swinging, sliding or not). And the like, at different speeds).
As the way of holding the data of the character image, for example, the data of "the number of rounds in which the over-winning prize was won!" And the data of "numbers (1 to 16 etc.)" are individually held and displayed in the gaming machine. You may make it do. The number of occurrences of the over-winning prize and the display mode are also variable, and the data capacity increases if all the possible numbers of images in which characters and numbers are set are stored as data, but by having them individually, it is possible to respond flexibly, Requires less data capacity.

Further, the timing for determining the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is not limited to the start of the special game state and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the timing may be at the start of each round game, or when the over-winning occurs. It may be.
Further, the timing for determining the type of the notification mode is not limited to the start of the special game state and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the timing may be at the start of each round game or at the time of occurrence of an over prize. Is also good.
Further, the timing for determining the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect and the timing for determining the type of the notification mode need not be the same. That is, the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect may be determined at the start of the special game state, and then the type of the notification mode may be determined at the start of each round game.

  Also, the special result mode of the decorative special figure change display game and the notification mode of the over-winning prize notification effect do not need to correspond to each other on a 1: 1 basis. That is, the first to third notification modes can be selected irrespective of the special result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game, and the selection rate of the first to third notification modes according to the special result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game. May be different. Specifically, for example, when the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode including even-numbered symbols, the first to third notification modes can be selected. When the first notification mode is most easily selected and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special result mode including the zigzag pattern of the symbol 7, the first to third notification modes can be selected. In the case where the second notification mode is most easily selected and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode including odd-numbered symbols other than symbol 7, the first to third notification modes are selected. It is possible to select the third notification mode most easily, and if the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode including the special pattern A, the first to third notification modes are available. The mode can be selected, and the first notification mode is selected among them. In the case where the result is the most easily selected and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special result mode including the special pattern B, the first to third notification modes can be selected. When the notification mode is most easily selected and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is the special result mode including the special pattern C, the first to third notification modes can be selected. Thus, the third notification mode may be most easily selected.

In addition, the information used for sorting the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is not limited to the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the reach system corresponding to the unstarted start memory is used. Or a result of a special figure change display game based on unstarted start memory.
In addition, the information used for sorting the type of the first notification mode is not limited to the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the reach system corresponding to the unstarted start memory is used. Alternatively, the result may be a result of a special figure fluctuation display game based on unstarted start memory.
Further, the information used for sorting the type of the second notification mode is not limited to the reach system corresponding to the undigested start memory, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special figure change display game based on the undigested start memory May be the result of

Further, in addition to (or instead of) the case where an over-winning occurs in the large winning opening, the over-winning-prize notification effect may be executed when an over-winning occurs in the starting winning opening. The case where an over-winning has occurred in the start winning opening means that the first starting memory (starting memory corresponding to winning in the starting winning opening 36) has the maximum number of storages (for example, four). When the game ball wins in the mouth 36, or when the number of stored second start memories (start memory corresponding to winning in the normal variable winning apparatus 37) is the upper limit number (for example, four), the normal variable winning apparatus is used. This is a case where a game ball has won a prize.
During the special figure during working hours, the jackpot is not easily generated, and there is a possibility that the game balls on the upper plate 21 are lost and the sense of being prolonged or the interest is reduced, but the starting winning opening (starting winning opening) 36, by executing an over-prize information presentation effect when an over-prize occurs in the normal variable prize-winning device 37), the number of points that can be watched increases and the interest of the game is improved. Further, by executing the over-prize information presentation effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit, and therefore, the interest in the start winning can be maintained.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (the special figure variable display game) executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning device (the special variable winning device). 38), in a gaming machine capable of converting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can easily win, when the number of game balls winning the variable winning device exceeds a predetermined number (in this embodiment, the maximum number of winnings). In addition, a prescribed number break production means (production control device 300) for executing a prescribed number break production (over-prize notification production) for notifying that the prescribed number has been exceeded, and the prescribed number break production means is provided. In addition, it is possible to notify that the specified number has been exceeded, and to indicate predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation and the probability set value) (see FIG. 62).
Therefore, not only is it possible to notify that the winning number of the game balls to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number, but also to indicate the predetermined information, by the specified number exceeding effect (over-winning information notification effect). Can be increased.

  Note that the method of determining whether or not the number has exceeded the specified number (that is, whether or not the specified number has been exceeded) can be appropriately selected. Specifically, in the present embodiment, for example, [1] it is determined whether or not the winning number of the game ball to the big winning opening exceeds the “winning upper limit number”, and it is determined that the “winning upper limit number” is exceeded. In this case, it is also possible to determine that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, to execute the specified number break production effect), and [2] the number of game balls to be won to the special winning opening is equal to or less than the “winning upper limit number”. If it is determined that the number is not equal to or less than the “winning upper limit number”, it is possible to determine that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, to perform a specified number breakthrough effect). It is determined whether or not the winning number of the game balls to the game is "winning upper limit number + 1", and when it is determined to be "winning upper limit number + 1", it is determined that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, the specified number breakthrough effect). Is executed), and [4] the winning number of the game ball to the big winning opening is "winning". It is also possible to judge whether or not the number is equal to or more than “limit number + 1”, and when it is judged that it is equal to or more than “winning upper limit number + 1”, it is possible to judge that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, to execute a specified number breakthrough effect). In addition, [5] it is determined whether or not the number of game balls winning the large winning opening is less than “winning upper limit number + 1”, and if it is determined that it is not less than “winning upper limit number + 1”, the specified number is exceeded. It is also possible to judge that the game has been performed (that is, to perform a specified number of effects).

In addition, the predetermined number surrender effect may be executed not only during the special game state but also during the small hitting game state. In the case of performing the predetermined number of break productions during the small hitting game state, the number of game balls won to the special variable prize winning device 38 (large winning prize) is the prescribed number (winning upper limit number, that is, the large winning prize during one round game). When the number of game balls that can win a prize is exceeded, an effect of breaching a specified number (over-prize information notification effect) may be executed.
Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit RUSH mode (a staging mode because small hits occur frequently), the number of payouts in the small hit RUSH mode is a predetermined number (a specific special game state (for example, Estimated number of payouts in a special game state in which all 4Rs are short-opened, and assumptions in a predetermined period in a special game state (for example, a period of 1 to 4R in a special game state in which all open-up to 4R are all long-open and 5R and thereafter are all short-opened) When the number of payouts or the specified number (for example, 1000) is exceeded, it is determined that the number of game balls won to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) exceeds the specified number, and the specified number breakthrough effect is produced. May be configured to be executed. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the game balls have been acquired more than the predetermined number, and to indicate the predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the big hit expectation degree and the probability setting value) by the breakthrough effect of the predetermined number. In the small hit RUSH mode, where the number of acquired game balls is increasing and the interest is increasing, the suggestion of predetermined information is further performed to further increase the interest, and the screen, the sound, and the LED are also watched. Can not delay.

  The variable winning device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38, but may be a normal variable winning device 37. When the variable prize winning device is the normal variable prize winning device 37, when the number of game balls won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 in one open state of the movable member 37b exceeds a specified number (for example, three), a specified value is set. A number breakthrough effect (over-winning-prize notification effect) may be executed, and the number of stored second start-up memories (start-up memories corresponding to winning in the ordinary variable prize-winning device 37) is the upper limit number (for example, four). In the state, when the game ball has won the ordinary variable winning device 37, it may be determined that the specified number has been exceeded, and a specified number breakthrough effect (over-prize notification effect) may be executed.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variable display game) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning port (start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37). In the case of a special result, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for executing a round gaming in which a large winning port (special variable winning device 38) is converted into a state in which a game ball can easily win, a special gaming state is executed a plurality of times. Notification means (effect control) for executing an over-prize notification effect for notifying the occurrence of an over-prize when the number of game balls winning the large winning opening exceeds a predetermined upper-limit number (win-limit upper limit number (for example, 10)). Device 300), the notifying means can notify the occurrence of the over-winning in the over-winning-prize notification effect, and can indicate predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the big hit expectation and the probability set value). Is so that configuration (see Figure 62).
Therefore, the over-prize information production can not only notify the occurrence of the over-prize to the large winning opening, but also suggest the predetermined information, thereby increasing the interest in the over-prize information production.

  In a specific round game (for example, the first round game, the last round game, the V round game, the probable change promotion effect execution round game), even if an over prize occurs, the over prize notification effect is not executed. Such a configuration is also possible. Here, the “V round game” includes a large winning opening having a V switch for detecting a game ball flowing into a specific area, and a large winning opening having no V switch, and a gaming ball is detected by the V switch. In this case, this is a round game in which the probability state of the special figure change display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, in which a large winning opening having a V switch is aimed at. In addition, the “probable change promotion effect” is an effect that determines whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and the “probable change promotion effect execution round game” , A round game in which a probable change promotion effect is executed.

  During the execution of the first round game, an effect or the like for informing what kind of big hit has occurred (whether a certain-variable big hit has occurred, whether a 16R big hit has occurred, or the like) is executed. In addition, during the execution of the round game of the last round, an effect or the like for notifying the number of game balls acquired during the special game state is executed. In addition, during execution of the V round game, an effect or the like for notifying the player to aim for a special winning opening having a V switch is executed. In addition, in the certainty-change promotion effect execution round game, a certainty change promotion effect and the like are executed. These effects are specific effects that notify a game result or a matter that affects the game result, that is, specific effects that notify the player of information that the player wants to know rather than winning over. Therefore, during execution of a specific round game, by configuring so as not to execute an over-prize notification effect, the over-prize notification effect and the specific effect are not performed in an overlapping manner, so that the specific effect is disturbed by the over-prize information effect. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest, and it is possible to surely notify information that the player wants to know.

  In addition, at least in a specific round game, it is possible to execute an over-prize notification effect that does not interfere with the specific effect. Specifically, the effect device used for the specific effect and the effect device used for the over-winning-prize notification effect may be different. That is, as the rendering device, a display device (such as the display device 41), an audio device (such as the speakers 19a and 19b), a light-emitting device (such as the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46), and an accessory device (the board rendering device 44 and the like) ), A vibrating device (such as a button or woofer that vibrates), a blower (a device that blows wind toward a player, etc.), and the like. For example, in a specific round game, a specific effect is provided by a display device and an audio device. It may be configured to execute the over-winning-prize notification effect by the light-emitting device and the blowing device. With this configuration, even if the over-prize notification effect and the specific effect are performed in an overlapping manner, the specific effect is not disturbed by the over-information notification effect, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, since the specific effect can be executed together with the suggestion of the predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation and the probability setting value), the interest can be improved.

  In addition, a large winning prize mouth where left-handed players are more likely to win, and a large winning prize opening where right-handed players are more likely to win, are used to change the way of hitting during the special game state (change from left-handed to right-handed). Or change from right-handed to left-handed) In a gaming machine, between the time immediately before the change of the hitting method and the time immediately after the change, the over-winning-prize notification effect is not executed even if an over-winning occurs. Is also possible.

Further, in a specific round game, only an over-prize notification effect that also indicates predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, an over-prize notification effect in the second notification mode or the third notification mode) can be executed, and other than the specific round game. In the round game of, only the over-prize notification effect that does not indicate the predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the over-prize information display effect of the first notification mode) may be executable. That is, in a specific round game, an over-prize notification effect that does not indicate the predetermined information is not executable, and in a round game other than the specific round game, an over-prize notification effect that also notifies (indicates) the predetermined information is not executable. Is also good.
Also, when the notification mode of the over-prize notification effect is determined to be the second notification mode or the third notification mode, in a specific round game, type 4 is easily selected as the notification mode type (or only type 4 is selected). May not be performed). Alternatively, conversely, in a specific round game, type 4 may not be easily selected as the notification mode type (or type 4 may not be selected). Since Type 4 is the type with the highest degree of expectation, it can be said that the over-prize notification effect performed in Type 4 of the second notification mode or Type 4 of the third notification mode is an effect that attracts the player's eyes. By configuring such an over-prize notification effect (that is, an over-prize notification effect performed in the type 4 of the second notification mode or the type 4 of the third notification mode) not to be executed in a specific round game, a specific round game is performed. Attention can be paid to round games, and interest can be improved.

In addition, when an over-winning occurs continuously from the first round game to a specific round game, in a round game after the specific round game, when the over-winning occurs, the over-winning is performed only in a specific notification mode. A notification effect may be performed. Specifically, for example, when an over-prize occurs continuously from the first round game to the fifth round game (that is, five consecutive times), in the sixth to sixteenth round games, The over-prize notification effect may be performed in the second notification mode or the third notification mode when an over-prize occurs (that is, the over-prize notification effect in the first notification mode may not be performed). Further, for example, when an over-prize occurs from the first round game to the fifteenth round game (that is, 15 consecutive times), an over-prize occurs in the 16th round game. At this time, an over-prize notification effect may be performed in the third notification mode (that is, the over-prize notification effect in the first notification mode or the over-prize notification effect in the second notification mode may not be performed).
In addition, when an over-winning occurs twice in succession, the over-winning information effect may not be executed when the second over-winning occurs. Thus, the over-prize notification effect is not continuous (does not overlap), so that the over-prize notification effect can be easily understood.

In addition, one of the condition that an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening 35 exceeds a specified number (for example, three in one round) are satisfied. In this case, an over-prize notification effect may be executed. As a result, not only the condition that an over-winning has occurred in the special winning opening but also the condition that the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 35 has exceeded the prescribed number is added, so that the execution of the over-winning-prize notification effect is performed. Because the frequency increases, the interest will improve.
Alternatively, when both the condition that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number are satisfied, the over-winning-prize notification effect is executed. You may do it.
Further, the over-prize notification effect may be executed not only during the special game state but also during the small hitting game state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize storage means (game control device 100) for storing a prize memory based on a prize of a game ball to a start winning opening (a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37). When a game ball wins to the starting winning opening in a state where the winning memory is stored in the winning storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number, a specified number breakthrough effect for notifying that the specified number has been exceeded (overwinning notification effect). Is provided, and the predetermined number break production means notifies the user that the specified number has been exceeded in the predetermined number break production, and sets the predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, (A big hit expectation or a probability set value).
With this configuration, it is possible not only to notify that the winning number of the game ball to the starting winning opening has exceeded the specified number, but also to indicate the predetermined information, by the specified number breaking effect (over winning notification effect). It is possible to enhance the fun of the production exceeding the stipulated number.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize storage means (game control device 100) for storing a prize memory based on a prize of a game ball to a start winning opening (a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37). In the event that a game ball has been won to the starting winning opening with the winning memory stored in the winning memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, an informing means for executing an over-winning notification effect for informing the occurrence of an over-winning (effect control). Device 300), and the notifying means is configured to notify the occurrence of the over-winning in the over-winning-prize notification effect and to indicate predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the big hit expectation and the probability setting value). be able to.
With such a configuration, the occurrence of an over-winning prize in the starting winning prize port can be notified as well as the predetermined information can be suggested by the over-winning prize notification effect, so that the interest in the over-winning prize notification effect can be enhanced.
For example, during the shift of the decoration special figure start storage display, the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed to notify (suggest) the result of the pre-reading, and the holding change production is performed. If an effect that the player pays attention to is being executed, such as during the display of the result mode (during symbol stop) in the decorative special figure variation display game, an over-notification to notify the occurrence of an over-winning to the starting winning opening. It may be configured not to execute the winning notification effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a setting means (gaming game) capable of setting one probability set value from among a plurality of probability set values to which probability values used for a lottery of a game (a special figure change display game) are assigned. The control device 100), the specified number break production means (production control device 300) includes a first production mode (first notification mode) for notifying that the predetermined number has been exceeded without suggesting the predetermined information, and a specified number. And a second effect mode (second notification mode) that indicates the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the game result will be a special result as the predetermined information, and that the predetermined number has been exceeded. At the same time, it can be configured to execute a breakthrough effect (over-prize notification effect) in a predetermined effect (third effect mode) that suggests the probability set value as the predetermined information (FIG. 62). reference .
With this configuration, it is possible to not only notify that the number of awarded game balls to the variable prize device has exceeded the specified number, but also to set a big hit expectation and a probability set value by a specified number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect). Because it can also suggest, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production exceeding the stipulated number.

In addition, the predetermined information which can be suggested by the over-prize notification effect is not limited to the jackpot expectation degree of the unstarted start memory and the currently set probability set value, and can be appropriately changed. It may be a reach occurrence expectation degree or a certainty transition expectation degree of undigested start memory.
In addition, the production exceeding the specified number (over-prize information production) includes the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the board production. It is only necessary that at least one of the operations of the device 44 be an effect for notifying (indicating) occurrence of an over-winning prize and predetermined information. When the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or a blowing device as a staging device, it is also possible to execute a breakthrough effect (over-winning-prize notification effect) using a vibrating device or a blowing device. .

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, an evaluation effect (over-winning evaluation effect) for evaluating the number of executions (ie, the number of occurrences of over-winning) in which a predetermined number of break-through effects (over-win winning notification effect) have been executed is executed. Evaluation effect means (effect control device 300), and the evaluation effect means can execute an evaluation effect during execution of a specific round game (in the case of the present embodiment, the last round game) in the special game state. Yes, in the evaluation effect, the number of executions can be evaluated, and predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, a jackpot expectation or a probability set value) can be suggested (see FIG. 65).
By configuring in this way, the effect of notifying that the winning number of the game ball to the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined specified number is not only a specified number breakthrough effect (over winning information notification effect) but also a specified number. An evaluation effect that evaluates the number of times the breakthrough effect has been performed (over-winning evaluation effect) can also be executed, so that the effect of notifying that the number of game balls winning the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined number is determined. Can be increased.

The evaluation effects (over winning evaluation effects) include the display on the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the panel effect device 44. At least one of the operations described above may be an effect that informs (indicates) the number of occurrences of over-winning prizes and predetermined information. When the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or a blowing device as a rendering device, it is also possible to execute an evaluation rendering (over-prize evaluation rendering) using the vibrating device or the blowing device.
Further, when an over-winning occurs in the starting winning opening (the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37), a predetermined number of production effects (over-prize information production) are executed, and the number of times the predetermined number of production productions are performed in a predetermined period of time. May be performed (over-winning evaluation effect). In addition, when the number of game balls won to the general winning opening 35 exceeds a specified number (for example, three in one round), a specified number breakthrough effect is executed, and the number of executions of the specified number breakthrough effect in a predetermined period is evaluated. An evaluation effect may be performed.
Which of the winning openings to be evaluated (whether the winning winning opening, the starting winning opening, or the general winning opening) may be changed according to the type of the big hit or the game state.

Also, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specified number break-through production means (production control device 300) notifies that the specified number has been broken in the predetermined number break-through production, and the predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, (A big hit expectation or a probability set value).
Therefore, not only is it possible to notify that the winning number of the game balls to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number but also to indicate the predetermined information by the number-of-specified-number production effect (over-prize information notification effect). The effect of notifying that the winning number of the game has exceeded a predetermined number can be increased.
When the evaluation effect (over winning evaluation effect) is configured to be executable, the predetermined number of effects (over winning notification effect) may not be able to suggest predetermined information.

<Winning number information presentation>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a winning number notification effect of notifying the number of gaming balls that have won a special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during a round game. The effect control device 300 executes a big hit effect (a fanfare effect, a round effect, an interval effect, and an ending effect) during the special game state. The winning number notification effect is executed in the round effect among the effects during the big hit.
In the present embodiment, the maximum winning number (that is, the number of game balls that can win a large winning opening during one round game) is set to 10, but the maximum winning number is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. is there.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the game control device 100 ends the display time (stop display time of the special figure) set in step A603 of the special figure changing process (FIG. 22). Then, the big hit fanfare time (see step A720 in FIG. 23) is set, and a fanfare command (see step A716 in FIG. 23) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect based on the reception of the fanfare command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the set jackpot fanfare time is over, the game control device 100 sets the first round big winning opening time (see steps A907 and A908 in FIG. 52). Then, the first round game is started and a round command (see step A902 in FIG. 52) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round game based on the reception of the round command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the game control device 100 sets a remaining ball processing time (see steps A1005 and A1006 in FIG. 53) and sets an interval A command (see step A1007 in FIG. 53) is transmitted to effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts an interval effect based on the reception of the interval command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, when the set remaining ball processing time ends, the game control device 100 sets an interval time (see step A1109 in FIG. 54).
Next, when the set interval time ends, the game control device 100 sets the big winning opening opening time of the second round, starts the second round game, and transmits a round command to the effect control device 300. . The effect control device 300 starts a round effect corresponding to the second round game based on the reception of the round command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the game control device 100 sets the final remaining ball processing time (see step A1008 in FIG. 53) when the special winning opening time of the final round ends. At the same time, an ending command (see step A1009 in FIG. 53) is transmitted to effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the game control device 100 sets the ending time (see step A1115 in FIG. 54) when the set remaining ball processing time ends, and when the set ending time ends. , End the special game state.

FIG. 67 shows an example of processing related to the winning number notification effect.
As shown in FIG. 67 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit ends, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), for example. , Start fanfare production.
Next, when the fanfare effect ends, the effect control device 300 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round game, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (c). Furthermore, at the same time as the start of the round effect, the winning number notification effect is started, and the same number of winning notification images M1 as the winning upper limit number (10) is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp the winning upper limit number in the round game being executed.

Thereafter, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 67 (d) to (f), the effect control device 300 deletes the winning notification images M1 one by one each time a game ball wins a special winning opening. As a result, the number of the deleted winning notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening in the round game being executed, and the player has won the special winning opening in the running round game. The number of game balls can be grasped. Then, when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, an over-winning-prize notification effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (b)).
Next, when the round effect corresponding to the first round game ends, the effect control device 300 starts an interval effect.
Next, when the interval effect ends, the effect control device 300 starts a round effect corresponding to the second round game and also starts a winning number notification effect, as shown in FIG. 67 (g), for example. The same number of winning notification images M1 as the winning upper limit number are displayed. Then, each time a game ball wins a special winning opening, the winning information image M1 is deleted one by one, and when an over-winning occurs in the special winning opening, an over-winning notification effect is executed. The effect control device 300 repeatedly performs such processing until the round game of the final round ends.

  Here, the winning number notification effect starts with the round effect, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the execution time of the fanfare effect is long and the fanfare effect does not end even if the big winning opening opening time starts. In, during the execution of the fanfare effect, that is, before the start of the winning number notification effect, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the large winning opening. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if a game ball wins to the special winning opening before the start of the winning number information production, after the winning number information production starts, the player wins the special winning opening before the start of the winning number information production. The winning notification images M1 of the same number as the number of the played balls are deleted one by one.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game with the big hit ends, ), The fanfare effect starts. Then, during execution of the fanfare effect, the game ball wins the big winning opening. Here, it is assumed that two game balls have won a special winning opening during execution of the fanfare effect.
Next, when the fanfare effect ends, the effect control device 300 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round game and also starts a winning number notification effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), for example. The same number of winning notification images M1 as the winning upper limit number are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 68 (d) to (e), for example, during the execution of the fanfare effect (that is, before the start of the winning number notification effect), the same number of the winning notification images M1 as the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening are displayed. Erase one by one. As a result, the number of the deleted prize notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during the execution of the fanfare effect, so that the player is executing the fanfare effect (that is, the prize number notification effect). Before the start), the number of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening can be grasped.
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 68 (f) to (g), for example, the effect control device 300 deletes the winning notification images M1 one by one each time a game ball wins a large winning opening. Then, when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, an over-winning-prize notification effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (b)).

The fanfare effect may be, for example, a start notification effect for notifying the start of the special game state as shown in FIG. 67 (b), or a player effect button 25 (touch panel) as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for example. 29 (including No. 29).
The operation intervention effect executed as the fanfare effect includes, for example, an effect of selecting a song output from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the big hit effect (see FIG. 68 (b)), and a character appearing during the execution of the big hit effect. And an effect of selecting an effect mode of a big hit effect.

Note that the erasing mode of the prize notification image M1 can be appropriately selected. For example, a mode in which the prize notification image M1 disappears instantaneously or a mode in which the prize notification image M1 gradually becomes thinner and disappears soon (a fade-out mode). ), The prize information image M1 may move outside the display area of the display device 41 and disappear, or the prize information image M1 may be displayed on the display area of the display device 41 by a predetermined character image. It may be in a mode of being blown out and disappearing.
In addition, when consecutive winnings occur in the special winning opening (that is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the special winning opening substantially at the same time), the game balls continuously winning in an erasing mode different from the normal erasing mode are used. The configuration may be such that the same number of winning notification images M1 are deleted. For example, in a case where the normal erasing mode is a mode in which the prize notification mode M disappears instantaneously and the prize notification mode M is deleted one by one, the same number of the prize notification modes M1 as the number of continuously winning game balls disappear instantaneously. The prize notification modes M1 may be erased one by one (or simultaneously) in a fade-out mode, in which the same number of game balls as consecutive winnings may be erased.

Further, in a round effect corresponding to a specific round game (for example, a round game in which a large winning opening time for short opening is set), a winning number notification effect may not be executed.
In addition, if the production mode of the winning number notification effect performed during the round production corresponding to the specific round game is different from the production mode of the winning number information production performed during the round production corresponding to the round game other than the specific round game, You may let it. Specifically, for example, in the winning number notification effect executed during a round game (a round game other than a specific round game) in which a long winning opening time for long opening is set, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, As described above, only the erasing effect of erasing the winning notification image M1 one by one each time a game ball wins a special winning opening is executed, and a round game (a specific round) in which a special winning opening time for short opening is set. In the winning number notification effect performed during the game, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the erasing effect of erasing the prize information image M1 one by one every time a game ball wins to the special winning opening, as well as the erasing effect. Other effects may be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (a), as an effect other than the erasing effect, a predetermined character appears based on the winning of a game ball in the special winning opening, and the character performs a predetermined dialogue (“Wow,” etc.). Performing the production that emanates.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the same number of winning notification images M1 as the maximum number of winnings is not displayed at the start of the winning number notification effect, and the game ball wins the large winning opening. The effect may be such that the winning notification image M1 appears one by one every time. In this case, since the number of the displayed winning notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening in the round game being executed, the player wins the large winning opening in the running round game. It is possible to grasp the number of played balls.
In this case, in the case where a game ball wins to the special winning opening before the start of the winning number notification effect (that is, during the execution of the fanfare effect), before the start of the winning number notification effect, after the start of the winning number information effect. In this case, the same number of winning notification images M1 as the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening appear one by one. In this case, the appearance of the prize notification image M1 can be appropriately selected. For example, the prize notification image M1 may appear instantaneously, or the prize notification image M1 may be gradually darkened (fade-in). Mode), or a mode in which the winning notification image M1 moves from outside the display area of the display device 41 to a fixed position in the display area. Also, in this case, when consecutive winnings occur in the special winning opening (that is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the special winning opening substantially at the same time), the consecutive winnings differ from the normal appearance. It may be configured so that the same number of winning notification images M1 as the number of played balls appear.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the current number of rounds may be reported by the round report image M2. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (c), each time a round effect is executed, one round notification image M2 appears, that is, the number of displayed round notification images M2 matches the current number of rounds. However, the reverse is also possible. In other words, the same number of round notification images M2 as the upper limit of the number of rounds (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) is being produced in the fanfare (or at the start of the round production corresponding to the first round game). And the round notification image M2 may be deleted one by one each time the round effect is executed. In this case, the number of displayed round notification images M2 matches the number of remaining rounds.
Further, the round notification image M2 and the number of rounds do not need to correspond to each other in a 1: 1 ratio. That is, each time a plurality of (for example, four) round effects are performed, one round notification image M2 may appear. Alternatively, conversely, the same number of round notification images M2 as the “upper number of rounds 複数 predetermined plural times” is displayed during a fanfare effect or the like, and the round notification image M2 is displayed each time the predetermined multiple round effects are executed. The data may be deleted one by one.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 69 (c), the same number of dotted lines ○ images as the upper limit of the number of rounds (that is, images showing the area where the round notification image M2 is displayed) are displayed during the fanfare effect or the like. It is not necessary to display the same number of dotted lines ○ images as the upper limit of the number of rounds. For example, the special winning opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the special opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R are long opening, 5 to 16R are short opening) as the special winning opening information indicating the jackpot pattern. Is selected, the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4R, and if the selected special winning opening information is the special winning opening information 2, the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect. In the round after the 5R, the special winning opening is opened with a long opening, and if the selected special opening opening information is the special opening opening information 3, the rank down effect is performed in the round continuous notification effect, and the round is performed. The non-continuation is notified, and the special winning opening may be opened shortly in the round after the 5R. In such a case, four dotted lines ○ images are displayed at first, and when the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect, the remaining dotted lines ○ images are displayed, and the round continuation is not performed in the round continuation notification effect Is notified, the remaining dotted line ○ image may not be displayed. As a result, the fact that the subsequent round is open for a long time can be notified by the additionally displayed dotted line image, and the interest is improved.
The winning notification image M1 and the round notification image M2 are not limited to circular images and can be changed as appropriate. For example, they may be polygonal images or character images. Further, the winning notification image M1 and the round notification image M2 may have different shapes.

Further, the winning notification image M1 is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, on the near side of the predetermined image displayed on the display area of the display device 41, that is, displayed on the display device 41. May hide a predetermined image.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 71A, the effect control device 300 starts a winning number notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and the same number of panel shapes as the upper limit number of winnings (here, a rectangular panel). ) Is displayed in front of a predetermined image (here, a character image, a line image, and a decoration image) displayed on the display device 41. Thereafter, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 71 (b) to (g), the effect control device 300 deletes the winning notification images M1 one by one each time a game ball wins a large winning opening. As a result, the predetermined image concealed by the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 as many as the winning upper limit number becomes gradually visible. Then, when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, an over-win winning information effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (h). Here, an over-prize notification effect using the predetermined image hidden by the prize notification image M1 is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the predetermined images are a character image, a line image, and a decoration image. However, the predetermined images are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the shape and size of the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 are the same as the shape and size of the small area obtained by dividing the display area of the display device 41 by the same number as the winning upper limit number. Since they are the same, the entirety of the predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 is hidden by the same number of panel-shaped winning notification images M1 as the maximum number of winnings, but the shape and size of the panel-shaped winning notification images M1 are It can be changed as appropriate. That is, it suffices if at least a part of the predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 can be concealed by the panel-shaped winning notification images M1 of the same number as the winning upper limit number.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 71, the over-prize information production is executed when an over-prize to the special winning opening occurs, but the over-prize information production also starts at the start of the prize information production, and the panel-shaped prize is produced. The notification image M1 may hide an image relating to the over-prize notification effect (for example, an image shown in FIG. 71 (h), hereinafter referred to as an “over-prize notification image”). Specifically, at the start of the winning number notification effect, a panel-shaped winning notification image M1 having the same number as the “winning upper limit number + 1” is displayed in front of the over-prize notification image as the predetermined image. At this time, other than the dialogue image (for example, a character image or a decoration image) in the over-prize notification image is concealed by the panel-like prize notification image M1 of the same number as the maximum number of prizes, and the dialogue in the over-prize notification image is performed. The image (for example, “It's hot!”) Is hidden by the remaining panel-shaped winning notification image M1. Then, every time a game ball wins a special winning opening, the winning notification image M1 for concealing other than the line image is deleted one by one, and when an over-winning occurs, the winning notification image M1 for concealing the line image is deleted. You may do it. As a result, a part of the over-prize information image can be visually recognized before the over-prize occurs, thereby increasing the interest in the over-prize.

Further, in this case, one of a condition that an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred and a condition that the number of winning of the game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds a prescribed number (for example, three in one round). May be deleted, the winning notification image M1 that hides the line image may be deleted. Thereby, not only the condition that an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred but also the condition that the number of winning of the game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number is added, and the winning image for concealing the line image is added. Since the erasure probability of the notification image M1 is increased, interest is improved.
Alternatively, when both the condition that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of winning of the game balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number are satisfied, the winning image that hides the dialog image is won. The notification image M1 may be deleted.
Further, in this case, the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 is not an image that conceals (makes invisible) the over winning notification image, but an image (for example, a translucent image) that makes the over winning notification image difficult to view. May be. Thereby, even if the winning notification image M1 that conceals the serif image is not erased, it is possible to guess the content of the notification or suggestion by the over winning notification effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The panel-shaped winning notification image M1 (a winning notification image M1 that makes a predetermined image invisible or a winning notification image M1 that makes a predetermined image difficult to view) may be a large winning opening. Instead of deleting when a game ball wins or an over-win occurs, the game ball may be gradually changed to be transparent. In this case, the portion of the predetermined image that is hidden by the winning notification image M1 can be visually recognized via the transparent winning notification image M1.

In addition, the winning number notification effect includes the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44. At least one effect may be used as long as it is an effect that notifies the number of gaming balls that have won the large winning opening in the running round game. When the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or a blowing device as a staging device, it is also possible to execute a winning number notification effect using the vibrating device or the blowing device.
In other words, as shown in FIG. 72, for example, the winning number notification effect may be an effect of notifying the number of gaming balls that have won a large winning opening in the round game being executed by emitting light of the LED of the frame decoration device 18. . Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72A, the effect control device 300 starts the winning number notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and among the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18, The LEDs arranged in the predetermined area are turned on. Here, the predetermined area of the glass frame 15 is the same number of areas 15a to 15j as the winning upper limit number (10).

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) to (c), for example, each time a game ball wins the special winning opening, the effect control device 300 switches from the LED arranged in the first area 15a to the second area 15b. The arranged LEDs → the LEDs arranged in the third region 15c → the LEDs arranged in the fourth region 15d → the LEDs arranged in the fifth region 15e → the LEDs arranged in the sixth region 15f → the seventh region 15g. The arranged LEDs are turned off in the order of the LEDs arranged in the eighth area 15h, the LEDs arranged in the ninth area 15i, and the LEDs arranged in the tenth area 15j. Accordingly, the number of non-light emitting areas matches the number of gaming balls that have won the special winning opening in the round game being executed, and the player can determine whether or not the gaming balls have won the special winning opening in the running round game. The number can be grasped.
Alternatively, conversely, at the start of the winning number notification effect, the LED arranged in the predetermined area of the glass frame 15 is turned off, and every time a game ball wins the big winning opening, the LED arranged in the first area 15a → The LEDs arranged in the second area 15b, the LEDs arranged in the third area 15c, and so on may be turned on in this order. In this case, since the number of light emitting areas matches the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening in the running round game, the player can determine the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening in the running round game. Can be grasped.

In addition, instead of the winning number notification effect, it is also possible to execute a payout number notification effect of notifying the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening.
As shown in FIG. 73, for example, the number-of-payouts notification effect notifies the sum of the number of payouts based on winning of game balls into the special winning opening and the number of payouts based on winning of game balls into the general winning opening 35. It may be a production that does.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73A, the effect control device 300 starts the number-of-payouts notification effect together with the start of the round effect, and displays the total number of payouts in the round game being executed. Then, every time a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, for example, "+3" is added to the total number of payouts, and every time a game ball wins the large winning opening, for example, "+15" is added to the total number of payouts. . Further, during execution of the fanfare effect, that is, when the game ball wins to the special winning opening or the general winning opening 35 and the payout based on the winning is performed before the start of the payout number notification effect, for example, FIG. As shown, after the number-of-payouts notification effect is started, the number of game balls paid out during the execution of the fanfare effect is added to the total number of payouts. As a result, the player can grasp the total number of payouts in the round game being executed, thereby improving the interest.
In this case, the payout number notification effect may be an effect notifying the total number of payouts in the running round game, but an effect of notifying the total number of payouts in the special game state occurring. That is, when the next round game starts, the total number of payouts may not be cleared to 0, but may be continuously updated (added) until the special game state ends. As a result, the player can grasp the total number of payouts in one special game state, thereby improving the interest.

  Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the effect control device 300 starts the number-of-payouts notification effect together with the start of the round effect, and displays the remaining number of payouts in the round game being executed. Each time a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, for example, "+3" is subtracted from the remaining payout number, and every time a game ball wins the large winning opening, for example, "+15" is subtracted from the remaining payout number. . Further, when the game balls are paid out even when the remaining number of payouts becomes “0” (that is, when the number of game balls paid out exceeds the expected payout number in one round game), the specific effect ( For example, an effect of displaying a character image such as "?" Further, during the execution of the fanfare effect, that is, when the game ball wins to the special winning opening or the general winning opening 35 and the payout based on the winning is made before the start of the payout number notification effect, for example, FIG. As shown, after the number-of-payouts notification effect starts, the number of game balls paid out during the execution of the fanfare effect is subtracted from the remaining number of payouts. Thereby, the player can know that the number of remaining payouts in the round game being executed or the number of game balls to be paid out exceeds the expected number of payouts in one round game, thereby increasing the interest.

  In this case, the effect of notifying the number of payouts may be an effect of notifying the remaining number of payouts in the running round game, but an effect of notifying the remaining number of payouts in the special game state that is occurring. That is, when the next round game starts, the estimated number of payouts (for example, “150”) in one round game is displayed and the estimated number of payouts is not subtracted, but at the start of the first round game. The estimated payout number (for example, “2000”) in one special game state may be displayed, and the estimated payout number may be continuously reduced until the special game state ends. As a result, the player can grasp the number of remaining payouts in one special game state, thereby improving interest.

  The payout number notification effect is at least one of the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44. In any case, any effect may be used as long as the effect is to notify the number of gaming balls that have won the large winning opening in the round game being executed. When the gaming machine 10 includes a vibrating device or a blowing device as a staging device, it is also possible to execute a payout number notification effect using the vibrating device or the blowing device.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (the special figure variable display game) executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is a special result, the special winning opening (the special variable winning device) 38) is a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a round game is executed a plurality of times to convert a game ball into a state in which a game ball is easy to win. The game ends when the number of game balls winning the special winning opening reaches a specified number (winning upper limit number) or when a predetermined time (large winning opening opening time) elapses. A special game effect (during a big hit) including a start effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the game state and a round effect performed during the round game can be executed. During the execution of a game (in the present embodiment, the first round game), it is possible to end the start effect and start a round effect corresponding to the specific round game (FIG. 66 (c)). )), In the round effect, it is possible to execute a winning number notification effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening, and in the round effect corresponding to the specific round game after the start effect is completed, During the execution of the effect, a winning number notification effect is executed for the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening (see FIG. 68).

Therefore, in the round effect, it is possible to execute a winning number notification effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening, and further, in the round effect corresponding to the specific round game after the start effect is completed, During the execution of the start effect, the number-of-winning-prize notification effect is performed for the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening, so that the special game effect (big hit medium effect) can be enhanced.
The specific round game is not limited to the first round game (the first round game). That is, the specific round game may be a round game other than the first round game, such as the second round game.
Further, the winning number notification effect may be executed not only during the special game state but also during the small hitting game state.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the round effect, after displaying a predetermined number of predetermined images (winning notification images M1), the predetermined images are erased every time a game ball is won to the special winning opening. It is possible to execute a winning number notification effect that does not display a predetermined image in the start effect, and corresponds to a specific round game when a game ball wins to a large winning opening during execution of the start effect. In the winning number notification effect executed in the round effect, it is possible to delete a predetermined number of images corresponding to the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during execution of the start effect (see FIG. 68).

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the number of game balls that have won the grand prize mouth in the round game being executed, and also to notify the number of game balls that have won the grand prize hole before the start of the winning number notification effect, It is possible to enhance the interest in the special game production (big hit production).
Also, the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) is not displayed during the start effect (fanfare effect), and the predetermined image is displayed only during the round effect. Therefore, the predetermined image is always displayed (the predetermined image is also displayed during the start effect). Is displayed, a special feeling can be given to the round effect. Therefore, the interest of the round effect is improved, and the interest of the effect during the special game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a special effect including a start effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game. It is possible to execute an effect during a game (during a big hit), and during the execution of a specific round game (in the present embodiment, the first round game) in the special game state, the start effect is terminated and the specific It is possible to start a round effect corresponding to the round game (see FIG. 66 (c)), and in the round effect, a predetermined image (prize notification) for each winning of the game ball to the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38). The winning number notification effect displaying the image M1) can be executed (see FIG. 69 (b)), the predetermined image is not displayed in the start effect, and the special winning effect is performed during the start effect. When a game ball wins, a predetermined number of images corresponding to the number of game balls that have won a special winning opening during execution of the start effect in a winning number notification effect executed in a round effect corresponding to a specific round game. May be displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the number of game balls that have won the grand prize mouth in the round game being executed, and also to notify the number of game balls that have won the grand prize hole before the start of the winning number notification effect, It is possible to enhance the interest in the special game production (big hit production).
Also, the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) is not displayed during the start effect (fanfare effect), and the predetermined image is displayed only during the round effect. Therefore, the predetermined image is always displayed (the predetermined image is also displayed during the start effect). Is displayed, a special feeling can be given to the round effect. Therefore, the interest of the round effect is improved, and the interest of the effect during the special game can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs a selection effect (operation intervention) for causing the player to select one of a plurality of options in a start effect (fanfare effect). (Effect) can be executed (see FIG. 68 (b)).
With such a configuration, the merit of not displaying the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) during the start effect (fanfare effect) can be expanded. That is, since the predetermined image is not displayed during the start effect, it is possible to concentrate on the selected effect, so that the interest of the start effect is improved and the interest of the special game effect is enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a general winning opening 35 in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning of the game balls, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, In the round game, when the number of winning of game balls to the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (winning upper limit number) reaches a specified number, or a predetermined time (large winning opening time) has elapsed. In this case, the effect control means can execute a special game effect (during a big hit) including a start effect (a fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of a special game state and a round effect performed during a round game. Yes, during the execution of a specific round game (in the present embodiment, the first round game) in the special game state, the start effect is ended and a round effect corresponding to the specific round game is performed. (Refer to FIG. 66 (c)), and in the round effect, a payout number notification effect corresponding to the payout number based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35 can be executed. In a round effect corresponding to a specific round game after the end of the start effect, the payout number information effect for the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35 during execution of the start effect. (See FIGS. 74 and 75).
With this configuration, in the round effect, it is possible to execute a payout number notification effect corresponding to the payout amount based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35, and further, the start effect is completed. In a round effect corresponding to a later specific round game, it is possible to execute a payout number notification effect corresponding to the payout number based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening and the general winning opening 35 during the execution of the start effect. Because it is possible, it is possible to raise the interest of the special game production (big hit production).

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combinations.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 35 general winning opening 38 special variable winning device (variable winning device, large winning opening)
100 game control device (setting means)
300 production control device (specific number production production means, evaluation production means, production control means)

Claims (1)

A game capable of generating a special game state in which a round game in which a large winning opening is converted to a state in which a game ball is easy to win is executed a plurality of times when a result of a game executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result. On the machine,
A general winning opening in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls,
Effect control means for controlling the effect of the game,
The round game ends when the winning number of the game ball to the special winning opening reaches a specified number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a special game effect including a start effect performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game,
During the execution of the specific round game in the special game state, it is possible to end the start effect and start a round effect corresponding to the specific round game,
In the round effect, it is possible to execute a number-of-payout notification effect corresponding to the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the general winning opening,
In the round effect corresponding to the specific round game after the end of the start effect, the payout for the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening and the general winning opening during execution of the start effect. A gaming machine characterized by executing a number notification effect.

Images